2003 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual...

2003 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................. ii

Your Car at a Glance ...........................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 55 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features .............................................................................................. 111 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 203 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 217 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 245 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer. Appearance Care.............................................................................................................................. 325 Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 333 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 361 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 377 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 381 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index ..................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Information Provided by:

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Accord Sedan. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the car, and shouldremain with the car when it is sold.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur enfrançais, veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 33SDAC00 .

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Information Provided by:

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so youcan refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helpsto keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. Whenyour car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff isspecially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. YourHonda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

iInformation Provided by:

－

－

－

－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thiscar safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your car. You must useyour own good judgement.

on the car.

how to use this car correctly and safely.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Section

Safety Headings

Safety Labels

Instructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.


Your Car at a Glance

2

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

DOOR LOCK SWITCH(P.79)

AUDIO SYSTEMDIGITAL CLOCK

(P.96)

(P.101)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P.112)

(P.206)

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS (P.72)

(P.134, 150, 169)(P.139, 156, 174)

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE(P.84/204)


＊

＊

Only on cars equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Your Car at a Glance

3

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

HORN

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

MOONROOFSWITCH

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

(P. 69)

(P. 73)

(P. 72)

HAZARDWARNING LIGHTS

CRUISE CONTROLS

:

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

(P. 100)

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT

(P. 70, 71/72)

(P. 232)

(P. 195)

(P. 72, 112, 125, 131)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS(P. 68/70)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS(P. 192)


4Information Provided by:

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your car.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 10..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11

............................Protecting Adults . 12.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 12

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13

............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15

5. Fasten and Position the Seat.....................................Belts . 15

....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 187. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

........................Protecting Children . 21All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 21Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 22The Passenger’s Front Airbag

Poses Serious Risks to...............................Children . 22

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 24

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 25

...Additional Safety Precautions . 25General Guidelines for Using

...............................Child Seats . 26.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.........Protecting Small Children . 33

.......Protecting Larger Children . 36Using Child Seats with

.....................................Tethers . 39.............................Using LATCH . 40

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 42

..Seat Belt System Components . 42......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 42

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 43

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 44Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 45........................SRS Components . 45

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 45

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 47How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 48..How the SRS Indicator Works . 48

How the Side Airbag Cutoff...........Indicator Light Works . 49

.............................Airbag Service . 51...Additional Safety Precautions . 51

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52...................................Safety Labels . 53

Driver and Passenger Safety



Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in the back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your car is equippedwith airbags, make sure you andyour passengers always wear yourseat belts, and wear them properly.(See page .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

7

15

21

248


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Car in Safe ConditionDon’t Drink and Drive


＊

＊

＊

Your car is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Car’s Safety Features

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

If equipped:

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column


In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your car isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your car has airbags.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Keep you connected to the car soyou can take advantage of the car’sbuilt-in safety features.



Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.


Your car has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the car andagainst other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the car.

Your car also has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact.

CONTINUED

Standard on V-6 and EX models.Optional on the U.S. LX model



Airbags

What you should do:


Your car’s seats are designed to keepyou in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the car, or by aninflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Your car also has side curtainairbags. During a moderate to severeside impact, side curtain airbags helpto protect the heads of the driver,front seat passenger, and passengerssitting in the outer rear seatingpositions.

U.S. EX-V6 model, optional on CanadianEX-V6 model



Seats and Seat-Backs

What you should do:

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.


Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

All doors are closed and locked(see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your car’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin the back seat (see page ).

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever the car ismoving.

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe car during a crash. It also helpsprevent occupants from accidentallyopening a door and falling out, andoutsiders from unexpectedly openingyour doors.

15

14

15

12

21

13

214



Pre-Drive Safety Checklist

Head Restraints

Door Locks

What you should do:


For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

Your car has a door monitor light onthe instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the car is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the car during a crash.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

36

78


Protecting Adults

Close and Lock the Doors

Introduction

1.


Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the car.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches away fromthe center of the steering wheel. Inaddition to adjusting the seat, youcan adjust the steering wheel in andout (see page ).

Also make sure your front seatpassenger moves the seat as far tothe rear as possible.

87

73

Protecting Adults

Adjust the Front Seats2.

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.


A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

87

Protecting Adults


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.


Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

91

CONTINUED

Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

4. 5.


Protecting Adults

15

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.


Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack from theshoulder part, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder. This

spreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upperbody.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Protecting Adults

Driver and Passenger Safety16

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.


To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts.

42

Protecting Adults


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

17

RELEASEBUTTONS


Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thecar is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the car, orby being struck by an inflating frontairbag. Being struck by an inflatingside airbag can result in possiblyserious injuries.

73


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.


Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your car’s airbagsand other safety features, you mustsit properly and wear your seat beltproperly.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a car.

Protecting Adults

Advice for Pregnant Women

Driver and Passenger Safety 19Information Provided by:

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If a side airbag or a sidecurtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the car andhurt someone.

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel or on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe front airbag inflates.

Protecting Adults


Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

On models with side airbags orside curtain airbags, do not attachhard objects on or near a frontdoor.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.


(See page.)

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your car, be sure toread this section.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in car crashes because theyare either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, caraccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a car.

(See page .)

26

36

properly

CONTINUED


Protecting Children

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt, and use abooster, if needed.

21

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

During acrash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

In the back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it inflates with tremendousspeed.If you are wearing a seat belt, the

child can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour car crashes into a parked carat 30 mph (48 km/h), a 20-lb(9 kg) infant will become a 600-lb(275 kg) force, and you will not beable to hold on.

If the airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure an infant.


Protecting Children

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a car equipped witha passenger’s airbag.

Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagPoses Serious Risks to Children


To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your car haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

If the car seat is too farforward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, in a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. (See page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren.)

36

CONTINUED

Small Children

Larger Children

U.S. ModelsPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a car equipped witha passenger’s front airbag can behazardous.

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Protecting Children


To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your car has warning labelson the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Your car has three seating positionsin the back seat where children canbe properly restrained.

If you ever have to carry more thanthree children in your car:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Move the car seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

36

13

18

15

Protecting Children


If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Canadian Models


Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a car on a hot daycan die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe car in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Usingthis feature will prevent childrenfrom playing with the windows,which could expose them tohazards or distract the driver (seepage ).

84

96

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsUse childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in yourcar.

Use the main power windowswitch to prevent children fromopening the rear windows.


Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the box and seat.

Childrenwho play in cars can accidentallyget trapped inside the trunk andbe seriously injured or could die.Teach your children not to play inor around cars. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlock cardoors, turn on the ignition, andopen the trunk, which can lead toaccidental injury or death.

30

85

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants:

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet safetystandards.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour car is not in use.

Keep car keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

2.1.

General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Protecting Children

Driver and Passenger Safety26Information Provided by:

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour car.

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, car seats, and seat belts,all child seats will not fit all carseating positions.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific car seatingposition (or positions) where theyintend to use the seat. If a previouslypurchased child seat does not fit, youmay need to buy a different one thatwill fit.

33

CONTINUED

Small Children:

The child seat should fit the carseating position (or positions)where it will be used.

3.

Protecting Children


This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your car.

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard.

The passenger’s front airbaginflates with enough force to killor seriously injure an infant in arear-facing child seat.

If a small child must ride in thefront, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

A small child in a forward-facingchild seat is also at risk. If thecar seat is too far forward, orthe child’s head is thrownforward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see pages and

).

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facingchild seat (see pages and ).

Not recommended,due to the front airbag hazard. If asmall child must ride in front,move the car seat to the rear-mostposition and secure a front-facingchild seat with the seat belt. (seepage ).33

30 40

4033

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s SeatInfants:

Back Seats

Small children:

Infants:

Small children:

Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

Protecting Children


After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the car during acrash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to the carwith the lap part of a lap/shoulderbelt. Some child seats can besecured to the car’s LATCHanchorage system instead. A childwhose seat is not properly securedto the car can be endangered in acrash. See pages , and forinstructions on how to properlysecure child seats in this car.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some cars orseating positions, it may be difficultto install a child seat so that it doesnot move at all. Some side-to-side orback-and-forth movement can beexpected and should not reduce thechild seat’s effectiveness.

31 34 40

Installing a Child Seat

Storing a Child Seat

Secure the child in the child seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe car.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back. Infants up to aboutone year of age must be restrained ina rear-facing child seat.

In this car, a rear-facing child seatcan be placed in any seating positionin the back seat, but not in the frontseat.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

We recommend that an infant berestrained in a rear-facing child seatuntil the infant reaches the seatmaker’s weight or height limit and isable to sit up without support.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant. If an infant must be closelywatched, we recommend thatanother adult sit in the back seatwith the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.


With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat directlybehind the front passenger seat,move the front seat as far forward asneeded, and leave it unoccupied. Oryou may wish to get a smaller childseat that allows you to safely carry afront passenger.

The lap/shoulder belts in the backseats have a locking mechanism thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.

The following pages provideinstructions and tips on how tosecure a rear-facing child seat withthis type of seat belt.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the car’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.

13

14

40

CONTINUED

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation


To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


CONTINUED

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In this car, the best place to install aforward-facing child seat is in one ofthe seating positions in the back seat.

A child who can sit up withoutsupport, and who fits within the childseat maker’s weight and heightlimits, should be restrained in aforward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

If the car seat is too farforward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to causevery serious or fatal injuries. If asmall child must be closely watched,we recommend that another adult sitin the back seat with the child.

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Child Seat Placement

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a car equipped witha passenger’s front airbag can behazardous.

Protecting Small Children


The lap/shoulder belts in the backand front passenger seating positionshave a locking mechanism that mustbe activated to secure a child seat.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe car seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the car, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

If you have a child seat designed toattach to the car’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.40

Child Seat Installation

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe car seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.


To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Protecting Children


When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat andwear a lap/shoulder belt.

If a child is too short for the shoulderpart of the belt to properly fit, werecommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt. Follow theinstructions on page . Then checkhow the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, asshown, the child is large enough towear the seat belt.

15

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Children


Protecting Larger Children

36

Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possible,uses a booster seat if needed,and wears the seat belt properly.


CONTINUED

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

If a child needs a booster seat, werecommend choosing a high or low-back style that allows the child to bedirectly secured with the lap/shoulder belt.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

Protecting Children


Using a Booster SeatDo not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.


The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

The back seat is the safest place fora child of any age or size.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

In addition, the passenger’s frontairbag poses serious risks to children.If the seat is too far forward, or thechild’s head is thrown forwardduring a collision, or the child isunrestrained or out of position, aninflating front airbag can kill orseriously injure the child.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

A child should continue using abooster seat until they exceed thebooster seat manufacturer’srequirements.

Even then, they may still need to usea booster seat. Note that some statesnow require children to use boostersuntil they reach a certain age and/orweight. Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

3615


Protecting Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Maturity

Physical Size


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Move the car seat to the rear-mostposition.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door because of theside airbag.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Your car has three tether anchoragepoints under the rear window forsecuring a tether-style child seat tothe car.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

To use the anchorage point, pivot itscover up.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point, and tightenthe strap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted. Route it betweenthe legs of the head restraint.

Protecting Children


Using Child Seats with Tethers

39

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTSTETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS


Your car is equipped with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) at the outer rear seats.The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The exact location of each loweranchor is marked with a small buttonabove the lower anchor point.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle orcenter seat belt away from thelower anchor.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Put the child seat in the rear leftor right car seat, and attach thechild seat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Using LATCH

40

LOWER ANCHOR MARKS Rigid type


Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point, andtighten the strap according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.Make sure the strap is not twisted.Route it between the legs of thehead restraint.Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

This symbol on rear or forwardfacing child seats or boostercushions indicates the presence ofLATCH compatible hardware.

4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children


Lower Universal AnchorageSystem Symbol

41

Flexible type

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS


This seat belt has a single belt thatgoes over your shoulder, across yourchest and across your hips. The seat belts in all seating positions

except the driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

Guide the belt across your body tothe door pillar. After exiting the car,be sure the belt is out of the way andwill not get closed in the door.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

31 34

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision that

might not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

15

48



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners


For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

329

HondaWarranty Information



Seat Belt Maintenance

U.S. Models

44

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.


Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Emergency backup power in caseyour car’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

Automatic seat belt tensionersthat tighten the front seat beltsduring a moderate to severefrontal collision.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

Your car is equipped with dual-stage,dual-threshold airbags to help reducethe chance of airbag-caused injuries.

48

CONTINUED

SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work


Additional Information About Your Airbags


After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the car’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.




In a moderate to severe side impact,the sensors will detect rapiddeceleration and signal the controlunit to instantly inflate either thedriver’s or the passenger’s sideairbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.Some models are equipped with side

airbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe car as soon as it is safe to do so.

U.S. Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

Canadian Owners:For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled

Only on models equipped with sideairbags

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.



How Your Side Airbags Work


The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with the front airbags or seat belttensioners. If equipped, it also alertsyou to a potential problem with theside airbags, the automatic cutoffsystem for the passenger’s sideairbag, or the side curtain airbags.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the car. If theimpact is on the passenger’s side, thepassenger’s side curtain airbag willinflate even if there are no occupantson that side of the car.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your car is equipped with sidecurtain airbags. These airbags arestored in the front, center, and rearpillars on both sides. The front andcenter pillars on both sides aremarked ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’

U.S. EX-V6 model, optional on CanadianEX-V6 model


How the SRS Indicator WorksHow Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork


SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG


CONTINUED

If you see any of these indications,your airbags may not deploy, yourpassenger’s side airbag automaticcutoff system may not work properly,or your seat belt tensioners may notwork when you need them. See yourHonda dealer as soon as possible.

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your car has anautomatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

It does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.




How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works

49

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your car checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.


A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

59




Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have your carserviced if:

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners, and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your car to anauthorized Honda dealer as soonas possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.

213

Airbag Service Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.




Your car’s exhaust contains carbonmonoxide gas. You should have noproblem with carbon monoxideentering the car in normal driving ifyou maintain your car properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The car is raised for an oil change.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The car was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

If you must sit in your parked car,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your car’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thecar out of the garage.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.


These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully. Ifa label comes off or becomes hard toread (except for the U.S. dashboardlabel which is removed by theowner), contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

On cars with side curtain airbags

On cars with side airbags

U.S. models Canadian models

U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety 53

SUN VISOR

HOOD DASHBOARD

DOORJAMBS

RADIATORCAP


This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 56...............................Indicator Lights . 57

.............................................Gauges . 63...............................Speedometer . 63

.................................Tachometer . 63Odometer/Outside

...........Temperature Indicator . 63.....................................Odometer . 63...................................Trip Meter . 64

...................Temperature Gauge . 64..................................Fuel Gauge . 65

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 65

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 67

...................................Headlights . 68Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 69

............Daytime Running Lights . 69....Instrument Panel Brightness . 69

................................Turn Signals . 70.....................Windshield Wipers . 70

..................Windshield Washers . 72..........................Hazard Warning . 72

.............Rear Window Defogger . 72......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 73

...............................Keys and Locks . 74..............................................Keys . 74

....................Immobilizer System . 76............................Ignition Switch . 77

..................................Door Locks . 78...................Remote Transmitter . 80

..............Childproof Door Locks . 84...........................................Trunk . 84

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 85....................................Glove Box . 86

............................Seat Adjustments . 87.............Front Seat Adjustments . 87

Driver’s Seat Manual Height..............................Adjustment . 88

Driver’s Seat Power Height..............................Adjustment . 88

Driver’s Seat Full Power............................Adjustments . 89

...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 90Front Passenger’s Seat

............................Adjustments . 91..........................Head Restraints . 91

.......................Folding Rear Seat . 92.................Rear Head Restraints . 93

......................Rear Seat Armrest . 93....................................Seat Heaters . 95

..............................Power Windows . 96Power Window Control

...............................Operations . 99.......................................Moonroof . 100

...........................................Mirrors . 101..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 101

...............................Parking Brake . 102.................Console Compartment . 103

..........................................Armrest . 103.........................Beverage Holders . 104.........................Center CD Pocket . 105

...................................Coin Pocket . 105........................................Sun Visor . 106

................................Vanity Mirror . 106........................Sunglasses Holder . 107

............Accessory Power Sockets . 107...............................Interior Lights . 108

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 55Information Provided by:


Control Locations

56

MIRROR CONTROLS

DOOR LOCK SWITCH

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

(P.79)

(P.96)

AUDIO SYSTEM

DIGITAL CLOCK

(P.101)

(P.206)

(P.139, 156, 174)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS(P.112)

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE

(P.134, 150, 169)

(P.84/204)

(P.72)

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS


The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls 57

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

LIGHT ON INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATORLOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR (P.58)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.62)

DOOR MONITOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.58)

(P.59)(P.59)

(P.62)

(P.61)

(P.61)

(P.59)

(P.65)

(P.60)

(P.58)

(P.61)

(P.58)

(P.58)

(P.60)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.62)

(P.59)

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR


The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your car.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

See page .

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

347

348

349

351

Indicator Lights


Seat Belt Reminder Light

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake and BrakeSystem Indicator

58

U.S. Canada


This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thecar to your dealer to have it checked.With the light on, your car still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock. For complete information, seepage .

This indicator lights briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, orside curtain airbags. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on as areminder that you have turned offthe Traction Control System. Itnormally comes on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II). If the TCS activationindicator and the TCS indicatorcome on and stay on at any othertime, or if they do not come on whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II), there is a problem with the TCS.Take the car to your dealer to have itchecked.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.49

231

48

On all V6 models


Indicator Lights


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Indicator

TCS Activation Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator


The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the trunk or any dooris not closed tightly.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the car should flash.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson and stays on when the TractionControl System (TCS) is on, there isa problem with the TCS. For moreinformation on the TCS, see page

.232

315

On all V6 models

Indicator Lights


Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

Door Monitor Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators


This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

This indicator lights when thesecurity system is set. See page

for complete information on thesecurity system.194

Indicator Lights


Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator

61

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR


This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the Cruise Control MasterButton. (see page .)

76

68

69

195

195

279

Canadian models only

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Canadian models only Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Washer Level Indicator

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Indicator Lights

Instruments and Controls62Information Provided by:

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The odometer and the outsidetemperature indicator use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the odometer and theoutside temperature, press theSelect/Reset knob. When you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), whatyou last selected is displayed.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your car has been driven. Itmeasures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Speedometer Tachometer

Odometer/Outside TemperatureIndicator

Odometer

Gauges


TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

TRIP METER

U.S. model is shown.

SELECT/RESETKNOB

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR


This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is located inthe front bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the road sur-face, engine heat, and the exhaustfrom surrounding traffic. This cancause an incorrect temperature read-ing when your speed is under19 mph (30 km/h).

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.models, and in Centigrade inCanadian models. To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.Both trip meters will reset if the car’sbattery goes dead or is disconnected.

345

On 4-cylinder EX models with leatherinterior and all 6-cylinder EX models

Gauges


Temperature GaugeTrip MeterOutside Temperature Indicator


This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the car is onlevel ground. It may show slightlymore or less than the actual amountwhen you are driving on curvy orhilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your car in forscheduled maintenance per theNormal Conditions maintenanceschedule. The indicator light doesnot reflect severe maintenanceintervals.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on page (4-cylindermodels) or page (6-cylinder

models).

250255 CONTINUED

4-cylinder models

Gauges


Maintenance Required IndicatorFuel Gauge

65

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

SELECT/RESET KNOB

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.


Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the Select/Resetknob in the instrument panel, thenturn the ignition switch ON (II).

Hold the knob for approximatelyten seconds until the indicatorresets.

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

1.

2.

3.

6-cylinder models

Gauges


＊

＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘H’’ logo.

The controls under the left air ventare for the moonroof and theTraction Control System.

The steering wheel adjustment leveron the underside of the steeringcolumn allows you to tilt andtelescope the steering wheel.


Controls Near the Steering Wheel

67

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

CRUISECONTROLS

TRACTIONCONTROLSYSTEM

MOONROOFSWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

(P. 69)

(P. 72)

(P. 73)

(P. 68/70)

(P. 100)

(P. 232)

(P. 70, 71/72)

(P. 195)

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT

(P. 72, 112,125, 131)

HORN


If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

To change from low beams to highbeams, push the turn signal leverforward until you hear a click. Theblue high beam indicator will light(see page ). To return to lowbeams, pull the turn signal leverback.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, and rearlicense plate lights. Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the headlights.

62



Headlights


The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights and license platelight within 15 seconds of removingthe key from the ignition switch andclosing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,open, then close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter ten minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s door

open, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

On all U.S. and Canadian models exceptDX



Automatic Lighting Off Feature Instrument Panel Brightness

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)


Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

This lever controls the windshieldwipers and washers. It has fivepositions:

MIST: mistOFF: offINT: intermittentLO: low speedHI: high speed

To select a position, push the leverup or down.

Turn Signals Windshield Wipers



70

TURN SIGNAL LEVER


To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever up from theOFF position. The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.This gives you a quick way to clearthe windshield.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. The sweepinterval will change slightly withspeed; getting shorter as you drivefaster. While the car is stopped andin gear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal. Inlow speed and high speed, the wipersrun continuously.

You can vary how often the wiperssweep the windshield by turning theINT TIME ring on the lever.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when car speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

On all models except DX



To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your car is disabled.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition. You have toturn it on again when you restart thecar.

Windshield Washers Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger


Instruments and Controls72

Manual A/C type shown


Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

To adjust the steering wheel:

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

1.

2.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

18

CONTINUED



Steering Wheel Adjustment

73

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thecar and be seriously injured in acrash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the car is stopped.


Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

The master key fits all the locks onyour car:• Ignition• Doors• Trunk• Glove box• Trunk release handle• Trunk pass-through cover• Rear seat trunk access

Your car comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition, making sure the wheelpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

3.

4.

5.

Controls Near the Steering Wheel, Keys and Locks


Keys


These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The valet key works only in theignition and the door locks. You cankeep the trunk, trunk release handle,trunk pass-through cover, rear seattrunk access, and glove box lockedwhen you leave your car and thevalet key at a parking facility.

The DX model keys do not containbatteries. Do not try to take themapart.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe tag stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

Some models also come with tworemote transmitters built into themaster keys; see page for anexplanation of the remotetransmitter operation.

80

Keys and Locks


Remote Transmitter

75

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITER

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

Only on DX models

On all models except DX

KEYNUMBERTAG

KEYNUMBERTAG


The Immobilizer System protectsyour car from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourcar’s key and the ignition switchwhile trying to start the engine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour car undriveable.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


－

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. If your car hasan automatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in Park. The anti-theft lock will lock the steeringcolumn when you remove the key.

CONTINUED

Ignition Switch LOCK (0)

Keys and Locks


Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.


－

－

－

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power socket.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the car are usable.Several of the lights on the instru-ment panel come on as a test whenyou turn the ignition switch fromACCESSORY to ON.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).76

ACCESSORY (I) Door Locks

ON (II)

START (III)

Keys and Locks


LOCK TAB


To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab down and close the door.

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the car, push the locktab in and close the door.

On LX and EX models, all doors canbe locked from the outside by usingthe key in the driver’s door. Tounlock just the driver’s door, turn thekey and release it. If you turn thekey again, all doors will unlock.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the top of theswitch to lock all doors; push thebottom to unlock them.

To lock the driver’s door, pull andhold either the inside or outside doorhandle, then push the lock tab down.Release the handle, then close thedoor.

On all models except DX, you canopen or close the windows by usingthe key in the driver’ s door (seepage ).

On Canadian DX models, all doorscan be locked from the outside byusing the key in either front door. Tounlock only the driver’s door fromthe outside, insert the key in thedriver’s door lock, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn the key again,all doors will unlock. All four doorswill unlock when you unlock thepassenger’s door with the key.

99

CONTINUED

On all models except U.S. DX

U.S. DX

Keys and Locks


MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH


If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver’s door by pushing in the locktab, the tabs on all doors pop out.Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou have locked the doors, you willhear a beep to verify that the doorsare locked and the security systemhas set.

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors unlock whenyou push the button a second time.The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash twice.

You can lock and unlock your carwith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorslock. The parking lights, side markerlights, and taillights flash once.

You can open and close all powerwindows from outside the car withthe key. With the remote transmitter,you can open the windows. Refer toPower Windows on page .99

On all models except U.S. DX

Lockout Prevention Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

UNLOCK/WINDOW-OPENBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON


CONTINUED

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about30 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if any door is notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

On all models except U.S. and CanadaDX

Keys and Locks


When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors, and theLED will not light. Replace thebattery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your car’s horn and exteriorlights to attract attention. The hornsounds and the exterior lights flashfor about 30 seconds. To activatepanic mode, press and hold thePANIC button for about two seconds.

1.

2.


Replacing the BatteryPanic Mode

Keys and Locks


SCREW


＋

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your car’s system byyour Honda dealer. Any othertransmitters you have will also needto be reprogrammed.

Install the parts in reverse order.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

4.

5.

3.




Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


BATTERY

TAB


The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the Lock position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

You can open the trunk in threeways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.(all models except U.S. DX)

52

214

Childproof Door Locks Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


PullLEVER

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE MASTER KEY


To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key. Also makesure the trunk pass-through coveris locked (see page ).

Give the person the valet key.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

As a safety feature, your car has arelease lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

1.

2.

94

25

Emergency Trunk Opener

Keys and Locks


MASTER KEY


Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.


－ To change the angle of the seat-back,pull up on the lever on the outside ofthe seat bottom. Move the seat-backto the desired position and releasethe lever. Let the seat-back latch intothe new position.To adjust the seat forward and

backward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

Adjust the seat before you startdriving.

The 4-cylinder EX models withoutleather interior have a power seatbottom height adjustment. All otherseat adjustments in these models aremanual.

All V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior have apower adjustable driver’s seat.

The DX and LX models in the U.S.have manual seat adjustments (seenext column).

The front passenger’s seat in all4-cylinder models, and the LX-V6models adjusts manually.

The EX-V6 model also has a poweradjustable passenger’s seat (Seepage ).91

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

Front Seat Adjustments

Seat Adjustments


Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push down the leverrepeatedly.

On all EX models without leatherinterior

On 4-cylinder LX models

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

Seat Adjustments


－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.You can adjust the seat with the

ignition switch in any position. Makeall adjustments before you startdriving.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

CONTINUED

Driver’s Seat Full PowerAdjustments

Seat Adjustments


Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward toincrease support and backward todecrease it.

On all EX and EX-V6 models

Driver’s Lumbar Support

Seat Adjustments


The seat adjustment switches are onthe outside edge of the seat bottom.Push the long horizontal switchforward or backward to move theseat bottom in that direction.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the vertical switch in thedirection you want to move.

The front head restraints helpprotect you and your passenger fromwhiplash and other injuries. They aremost effective when you adjust themso the back of the occupant’s headrests against the center of therestraint. A taller person shouldadjust the restraint as high aspossible.

The front head restraints adjust forheight. You need both hands toadjust the restraint. Do not attemptto adjust it while driving. To raise it,pull upward. To lower the restraint,push the release button sidewaysand push the restraint down.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15On EX-V6 model

Front Passenger’s SeatAdjustments

Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments


RELEASE BUTTON


When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the car or inside the trunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the car, insert the master keyin the lock on the rear shelf. Turnthe key clockwise, pull down the topof the seat-back, then release thekey.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Folding Rear Seat

Seat Adjustments


MASTER KEY

GUIDE

Pull


Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

The rear head restraints in the outerseat positions are adjustable. Pushthe release button, and move therestraint to the desired position.

The rear seat armrest is located inthe center of the rear seat. Pivot itdown to use it.

52

214

CONTINUED


Rear Seat Armrest

Carrying Cargo


Rear Head Restraints

Seat Adjustments


For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

The pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .52

Trunk Pass-through Cover


Seat Adjustments


KNOB

LID


The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. Because of the sensorsfor the side airbag system, there isno heater in the passenger’s seat-back.The ignition switch must beON (II) to use the heaters. Push thefront of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select LO by pushing the back of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

On EX-V6 models and EX models withleather interior


Seat Heaters


The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any of the passenger’s win-dows, push down on the appropriateswitch and hold it until the windowreaches the desired position. Toclose the window, pull back on thewindow switch. Release the switchwhen the window gets to the positionyou want.

Your car’s windows are electrically-powered. Turn the ignition switch toON (II) to raise or lower any window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pushing the switch upand holding it.


Power Windows

96

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.


－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will stop, and thenreverse direction. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passengers’ windows. With thisswitch off, the passengers’ windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver’s window. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe car so they do not injure them-selves by operating the windowsunintentionally.

CONTINUED

AUTO

Auto Reverse


Power Windows


If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the driver’s windowfuse is removed, the AUTO functionwill be disabled. The power windowsystem needs to be reset afterreconnecting the battery or installingthe fuse. You should do the following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourcar checked by a Honda dealer.

1.

2.

Power Windows


Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To close:

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again.

You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.

2.

3.

4.

All models except U.S. and Canada DX

Power Windows


Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the Windows withthe Key

Power Window ControlOperations

99

UNLOCK BUTTON

Close

Open


The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper button( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the lower button( ). Release the button whenthe moonroof gets to the desiredposition. Make sure everyone’shands are away from the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).


Moonroof


MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.


Push or pull the adjustment knobin the appropriate direction tomove the mirror right, left, up, ordown.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the knob.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

The outside mirrors on DX modelsadjust manually.

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment knob on the driver’s doorarmrest:

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

3.

4.1.

2.

CONTINUED


Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


ADJUSTMENT KNOB

TAB

ADJUSTMENT KNOB


To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. 58

On all Canadian models except DX

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake


HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the car with the parking brakeapplied can damage the rear brakesand hubs.


To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to the desired position.

On models except DX, the tray in theconsole compartment has a coinholder.

To close, lower the armrest and pushit down until it latches.

Console Compartment Armrest

Console Compartment, Armrest


CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER


Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor pockets.

The rear seat also has a beverageholder in the center armrest. To useit, pivot the armrest down.


Beverage Holders


FRONT DOOR

REAR DOOR


To open the center CD pocket, push-down on the center of the lid tounlatch it. It will swing openautomatically.To close it, push the lid down until itlatches.This pocket can store up to 12 CDs.

To open the coin pocket, pull the lidup.To close it, push the lid down until itlatches.The compartment cannot be used asan ashtray.

Center CD Pocket Coin Pocket

Center CD Pocket, Coin Pocket


Push


To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The lights beside the mirror comeon when you pull up the cover.

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.

All models except the DX havelighted vanity mirrors.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension (all models except DX andthose with side curtain airbags).

Do not use the sun visor extensionover the rear view mirror.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the car.

On EX-V6 models with side curtainairbags

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror


EXTENSION


Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

There are two accessory powersockets, one is located in the front ofthe center console. The other islocated in the center consolecompartment. To use an accessorypower socket, the ignition switchmust be in ACCESSORY (I) or ON(II).

To open the socket, pull the cover up.

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

CONTINUED


Sunglasses Holder Accessory Power Sockets


Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Sockets

107

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

COVER


These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

When both sockets are being used,the combined power rating of bothaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the centerposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door.

The ceiling light has a two-positionswitch. In the OFF position, the lightdoes not come on. In the DOORposition, the ceiling light comes onwhen you open any door.

On EX and EX-V6


Accessory Power Sockets, Interior Lights

Ceiling Lights

108

OOFFFF

OONN

DOOR ACTIVATED

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

COVER

DOOROFF

DOOR ACTIVATED


After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds. In the ON position,the ceiling light stays oncontinuously.

Turn on the spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

The ceiling light (with the switch inthe center position) also comes onwhen you unlock the door with theremote transmitter (see page ).The light fades out after all doors areclosed.

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

80

All models except DX

Interior Lights


Spotlights

109

On LX models On EX and EX-V6 models

COURTESY LIGHT


Your car also has a courtesy light inthe ignition switch. This light comeson when you open the driver’s door.It remains on for several secondsafter the door is closed.

Each front door has a courtesy light.This light comes on when you openthe door.


Interior Lights


Courtesy Lights

110

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

DOOR LIGHT


.....................Heating and Cooling . 112.........What Each Control Does . 112

............How to Use the System . 115..........To Turn Everything Off . 118

...............Climate Control System . 119

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 121

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 122

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 127.....................Manual Operation . 128

Sunlight Sensor/.............Temperature sensor . 133

................................Audio System . 134

.................Operating the Radio . 134

.................Adjusting the Sound . 138..........................Digital Clock . 139

.........Operating the CD Player . 140.......Protecting Compact Discs . 142.....Operating the CD Changer . 142....CD player Error Indications . 144

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 145

Operating the Cassette....................................Player . 146

...........Tape Search Functions . 148Caring for the Cassette

....................................Player . 149................................Audio System . 150

.................Operating the Radio . 151

.................Adjusting the Sound . 155..............................Digital Clock . 156

.....Operating the CD Changer . 157.......Protecting Compact Discs . 163


Operating the Cassette....................................Player . 165

...........Tape Search Functions . 167Caring for the Cassette

....................................Player . 168................................Audio System . 169

.................Operating the Radio . 170................Adjusting the Sound . 173

.............................Digital Clock . 174...................Radio Frequencies . 175

.......................Radio Reception . 175.....Operating the CD Changer . 177

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 184


......Protecting Compact Discs . 186Operating the Cassette

....................................Player . 187...........Tape Search Functions . 189

Caring for the Cassette....................................Player . 191

...........Remote Audio Controls . 192.......................Theft Protection . 193

............................Security System . 194...............................Cruise Control . 195

Homelink Wireless Control........................................System . 198

Without Navigation System

With Navigation System

DX and LX models



Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 111Information Provided by:

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator above this button is lit, airfrom the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

Air Conditioning is optional on theU.S. DX model.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

If your car does not have airconditioning, it can be installed atany time. Your dealer can install agenuine Honda air conditioningsystem that meets Honda’s highquality standards and is designed toexactly fit your car. Please contactyour dealer for more information.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for the bestvisibility.

72

On all models except EX-L and EX-V6


Heating and Cooling

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Temperature Control Dials

Fan Control Dial

What Each Control Does

112

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

MODE BUTTONS

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON


Use the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield,and the corner vents in thedashboard. When you select

or , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.

Heating and Cooling


Mode Buttons


The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials underneath them.

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls

114

CENTER VENTSTABS

TAB

CloseOpen

SIDE VENT


CONTINUED

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling


Ventilation

How to Use the System

115

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIALFAN CONTROL

DIAL

MODE BUTTONSAIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON


Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Turn on the A/C by pressing theA/C button. The light above thebutton should come on when a fanspeed is selected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is set to maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing theA/C button. Make sure the tem-perature control dial is set tomaximum cool.Set the fan to maximum speed.

Open the windows partially. Selectand Fresh Air mode.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.2.

3.

4.

64

On cars with manual air conditioningsystem


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

116




FAN CONTROLDIAL

MODE BUTTONS


To warm the interior:Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

Start the engine.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Once the engine is warmed up, thissetting is suitable for all drivingconditions.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. (The indicator above theA/C button stays off.)Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C turns off.But if it was on to start with, itstays on.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost


For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the side vents with the dialunderneath each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the car has been sitting out incold weather:

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. (The indicator above theA/C button stays off.)Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

1.2.

3.

Heating and Cooling


To Turn Everything Off


CONTINUED

To adjust the air flow from thecenter vent, move the tab up-and-down and side-to-side.

The side vents can be opened andclosed with the dials underneaththem.

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each side ofthe dashboard is adjustable.

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

On 4-cylinder EX models with letherinterior and EX-V6 models only

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features 119

CENTER VENTSTABTABS

CloseOpen

SIDE VENT



Comfort and Convenience Features120Information Provided by:

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button, then set thedesired temperature by turning thedriver’s temperature control dial.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upperlimit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs atfull cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.



Fully-automatic OperationWithout Navigation System

121

RECIRCULATION BUTTONOFF BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

AUTO BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL PASSENGER’S SIDE



Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Coff, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button


Comfort and Convenience Features122


DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL



▲▼

CONTINUED

You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing the fan controlbuttons: to increase the fan’sspeed, or to decrease the fan’sspeed.

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes; you can turn it offwith the dial below each vent. Eachtime you press the MODE button,the display shows the mode selected.Press the button four times to see all

the modes.

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator above this button is lit, airfrom the car’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Mode Button

Recirculation Button

Fan Control Buttons



MODE BUTTONFAN CONTROL BUTTONS



The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).72




125

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON




Your car is equipped with twotemperature control dials, one forthe driver, and one for the passenger.The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials when thegreen indicator in the DUAL buttonis lit.

Push the fan, the A/C, the AUTO, orthe button, and the settemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature byturning the driver’s control dial.

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then turn the driver’s control dial. Toset the passenger’s side to adifferent value than the driver’s side,turn the passenger’s control dial (seepage ). You can adjust thepassenger’s side without pressingthe DUAL button first.

125



Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Dials

126

PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE


▲

▼

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button. Theindicator in the button will light.Then set the desired temperature bypressing the temperature buttons:to raise the temperature above thedisplayed value, or to lower thetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature. Pressing the OFF button shuts the

climate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upperlimit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs atfull cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until the carhas been driven for a short time andthe heater starts to develop warm air.



With Navigation SystemFully-automatic Operation

127

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS


Touching ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF in the display.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Some ofthese functions appear in the A/Cdisplay. Press the A/C button next tothe display to show these functions.Making any manual selection causesthe indicator in the AUTO button togo out.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the temperaturecontrol buttons below the outsidetemperature. With the A/C off, usethe temperature control buttons toadjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.



Manual Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Icons

128

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) ICONS

MODE ICONS

FAN CONTROLICONS

A/C BUTTON


Use the MODE icons in the A/Cdisplay to select the vents the airflows from. Some air will flow fromthe dashboard corner vents and theside vents in all modes.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.

CONTINUED



Mode Icons


You can manually select the fanspeed by touching any of the fancontrol icons on the display.

This button controls the source of airgoing into the system. When theindicator in this button is lit, air fromthe car’s interior is sent through thesystem again (Recirculation mode).When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from outside the car(Fresh Air mode).

You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.



Recirculation Button

Fan Control Icons

130



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).72




131

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTONDUAL BUTTON


▲ ▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Your car has four temperaturecontrol buttons on the climatecontrol panel, two for the driver andtwo for the passenger. The driver’sand passenger’s sides can becontrolled independently by pushingthese buttons when the greenindicator in the DUAL button is lit.

Push AUTO or and the settemperatures appear in the display.When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature bypressing the or buttons on thedriver’s side.

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then press the or buttons onthe driver’s side. To set thepassenger’s side to a different valuethan the driver’s, press the orbuttons on the passenger’s side. Youcan adjust the passenger’s sidewithout pressing the DUAL buttonfirst.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.



Dual Temperature Control

Temperature Control Buttons

132

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE


The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.



Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

133

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR


The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset bars allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM button.Adjust the volume by turning thesame knob. You can use any of five methods to

find radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars.

DX and LX modelsAM/FM/CD Audio System

Operating the Radio

Audio System


STEREO INDICATOR

SEEK BAR

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR


－－－ The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar on either the or

, then release it. Depending onwhich side you press, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

CONTINUED

SCANTUNE SEEK

Audio System


－

－

－

To store a frequency:

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the three preset bars.Each side of the bars (1 6) willstore one frequency on the AM band,and two frequencies on the FM band.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar.

Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar andhold it until you hear a beep.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the left orright side of the proper preset bar totune to it.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour car’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

Audio System


A. SEL BUTTON

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

PRESET BARS

AM/FMBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

PWR/VOLKNOB


－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you set previously.When you return home, turn offAuto Select by pressing the A. SELbutton. The preset bars will thenselect the frequencies you originallyset.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset bars (1 6).You can then use the preset bars toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press the left orright side of any preset bar that doesnot have a station stored.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the preset bars.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset bars as describedpreviously.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System


SCAN BUTTON

A. SEL BUTTON

TUNE BAR

A. SEL INDICATOR

SEEK BAR


－

－

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode after you stop adjusting amode with the VOLUME knob.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe SOUND button. The modechanges from BAS to TRE to FAD toBAL, and then back to the selectedaudio mode, each time you press theSOUND button. Each mode is shownin the display as it changes.

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theSOUND button. Adjust the Balanceor Fader to your liking by turningthe VOLUME knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the SOUNDbutton. Adjust the desired mode byturning the VOLUME knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass


Audio System

138

VOLUME KNOB

SOUND BUTTON


If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the time setting will belost. To set the time again, follow thesetting procedure.

The audio system usually shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Itshows the operation mode of theradio, CD player, or optional CDchanger when you operate them,then goes back to the time displayafter three seconds.

You can use the R (Preset 6) side ofthe bar to quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Press the R (Preset 6)side of the bar while pressing theSOUND button. If the displayed timeis before the half hour, pressing Rsets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

To set the time, press and hold theSOUND button until the audiosystem beeps and the clock flashes.

To set the hours, press and hold theH (Preset 4) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

To set the minutes, press and holdthe M (Preset 5) side of the bar untilthe numbers advance to the desiredtime.

When you are finished, press theSOUND button again.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

Digital Clock

Audio System


DIGITAL CLOCK

PRESET BARS

SOUND BUTTON


For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

For information, see page .

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems. You can alsoplay 3-inch (8-cm) discs withoutusing an adapter ring. Avoid usingCDs that have adhesive-type labels.The edges can curl up and cause theCD to jam in the drive.

Examine the CD for any labels orother contamination on it that couldcause it to jam in the drive. With theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or ON (II), insert the disc into theCD slot. Push the disc in halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest of theway and begin to play. The numberof the track that is playing is shownin the display.

175

Audio System


Radio Frequencies and Reception

Operating the CD Player

140

CD SLOT

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

EJECT BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

RDM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB


You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Pressthe side to move backward.Release the bar when the systemreaches the point you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

CONTINUED


Audio System


－

－

－＋

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your car. It holds up to six discs,providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.


This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the RDM button. Youwill see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing RDM again.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) side or Preset 6(DISC ) side of the preset bar.Press the Preset 6 side to select thenext disc in the magazine. Press thePreset 5 side of the bar to select theprevious disc. If you select an emptyslot in the magazine, the changer will,after finding that slot empty, try toload the CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.186

Audio System


REPEAT Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

RANDOM PLAY

Protecting Compact Discs


When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the disc in the in-dashCD while it is playing, the systemwill automatically switch to the CDchanger and begin play where it leftoff. If there are no CDs in thechanger, the display will flash. Youwill have to select another mode(AM or FM) with the button.

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine. Check for an error indication.Insert the magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine. Check for an error indication.Insert the magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDMagazine

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD Changer

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System


＊

＊

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andauto-reverse for continuous play.

To operate the cassette player, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

Audio System


RPTBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

RPT INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BARS


▲

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the Preset 3(PLAY/PROG) side of the presetbar.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the Preset 4 (NR) side ofthe preset bar.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side ofthe preset bar.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button. Tochange back to the cassette player,push the CD/AUX button.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the eject buttonon the cassette player.

Audio System


－－With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the Preset 1(REW) side of the preset bar. Youwill see REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the Preset 2(FF) side of the preset bar. You willsee FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-tem out of rewind or fast forward.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it reverses direction andbegins to play.

Audio System


Tape Search Functions SKIPFF/REW


－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

191

Audio System


REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player


The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset bars allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

157

193

For EX, EX-V6, and LX-V6 models

AM/FM/CD ChangerAudio System


Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

PRESETBARS

TUNE BAR

SCAN BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK BAR


－－

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, or the AM or FM button.Adjust the volume by turning theknob.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Push the on the TUNE bar totune to a higher frequency, or pushthe to tune to a lower frequency.Hold the bar down until the displayreaches the desired frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on which sideof the SEEK bar you press, thesystem scans upward or downwardfrom the current frequency. It stopswhen it finds a station with a strongsignal.

CONTINUED

Operating the Radio TUNE SEEK

Audio System


－－

－

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.



Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the left orright side of the proper preset bar totune to it.



You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the three preset bars.Each bar will store two frequencieson the AM band, and fourfrequencies on the FM band.

Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar andhold it until you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

SCAN Preset

Audio System


－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press the left orright side of any preset bar that doesnot have a station stored.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset bars (1 6).You can then use the preset bars toselect those stations.

CONTINUED

AUTO SELECT

Audio System


PRESETBARS

AM/FM BUTTON A. SEL INDICATOR A. SEL BUTTON

TUNEBAR

SEEKBAR


If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the preset bars.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset bars as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you set previously.When you return home, turn offAuto Select by pressing the A. SELbutton. The preset bars will thenselect the frequencies you originallyset.

Audio System


TUNE BAR

PRESET BARS

A. SELBUTTON

SEEKBAR


－

－


For information, see page .

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theSOUND button. Adjust the Balanceor Fader to your liking by turningthe VOLUME knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theSOUND button.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe SOUND button. The modechanges from BAS to TRE to FAD toBAL, and then back to the selectedaudio mode, each time you press theSOUND button.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the SOUNDbutton. Adjust the desired mode byturning the VOLUME knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

175

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Treble/Bass

Audio System


SOUNDBUTTON

ADJUSTMENT LEVEL

VOLUME KNOB


For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, the time setting will belost. To set the time again, follow thesetting procedure.

The audio system usually shows thetime when the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Itshows the operation mode of theradio, or CD changer when youoperate them, then goes back to thetime display after three seconds.

You can use the R (Preset 6) side ofthe bar to quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Press R while pressingthe SOUND button. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.

To set the time, press and hold theSOUND button until the audiosystem beeps and the clock flashes.

To set the hours, press and hold theH (Preset 4) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

To set the minutes, press and holdthe M (Preset 5) side of the bar untilthe numbers advance to the desiredtime.

When you are finished, press theSOUND button again.

Digital Clock

Audio System


DIGITAL CLOCK

SOUND BUTTON

PRESET BARS


Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.


CONTINUED

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System


CD BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

RPT BUTTONDISC NUMBER

CD SLOT

LOAD BUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATOR


To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

To load a single CD:

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

On the upper left side of thedisplay, the disc number for anempty position will begin blinkingand the green CD load indicatorwill come on.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

The disc number for an emptyposition starts to blink and thegreen CD load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay, insert the disc into the CDslot. Insert it only about halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen, press the LOAD buttonagain. When ‘‘LOAd’’ appears inthe display, insert the next discinto the CD slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

If you are not loading CDs into all sixpositions, the system will beginplaying the last CD loaded.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, and you do notpress the LOAD button, the systemwill wait for ten seconds, then stopthe load operation and begin playingthe last CD loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Loading CDs in the Changer

Audio System


You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate side of apreset bar. Select an empty position(the disc number indicator is off),and press the left or right side of thepreset bar for that position (1 to 6).The system will stop playing thecurrent CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

CONTINUED

Audio System


RDM BUTTONSCAN BUTTONLOAD BUTTON

PRESET BARS

CD BUTTON SCAN INDICATOR

RPT BUTTON

RDM INDICATOR

RPT INDICATORSKIP BAR


－

－

－

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar (16). If you select an empty position inthe CD changer, the system will gointo the loading sequence (see page

).

Each time you press andrelease it, the system skips forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press and release to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press and release itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious track.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay as a reminder. The systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. Press the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing either side of theSKIP bar also turns off the repeatfeature.

This feature,when activated, plays the trackswithin a CD in random order, ratherthan in the order they are recordedon the CD. To activate Random Play,press the RDM button. You will seeRDM in the display. The system willthen select and play tracks randomly.This continues until you deactivateRandom Play by pressing the RDMbutton again, or you select adifferent CD with a preset bar.

You can use the SKIP bar while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the left or right side of theSKIP bar. You will hear a beep andthe system will continue to move.Press to move forward, or

to move backward. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ inthe display. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in theCD changer. You will see the discand track numbers displayed.

158

Operation REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

Audio System


If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWRbutton or the ignition switch, playwill continue at the same point whenyou turn it back on.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button. Each timeyou press the AM/FM button, thesystem will change to the next mode;FM1, FM2 or AM. When you returnto CD mode by pressing the CDbutton, play will continue at the samepoint that it left off.

CONTINUED

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

CD BUTTON PWR BUTTON


To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theLoad sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode (AM, FM1, or FM2).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds, and select theprevious mode (AM or FM). Tobegin playing the disc, press the CDbutton.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with the left orright side of the appropriate presetbar. When that CD begins playing,press the eject button.

Removing CDs from the Changer

Audio System


CD BUTTON CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON



.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off by pressing theeject button. The disc that was lastselected is ejected first. You caneject up to five discs, one at a time.

If you press the eject button whilelistening to the radio, or with theaudio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

186


Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Insert CDs.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDChanger


Audio System


＊

＊



2



CONTINUED


Audio System


RPTBUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

RPT INDICATOR

PWR/VOL KNOBSEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BARS


▲

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the Preset 3(PLAY/PROG) side of the presetbar.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the Preset 4 (NR) side ofthe preset bar.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side ofthe preset bar.



Audio System


－－With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.


side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the Preset 1(REW) side of the preset bar. Youwill see REW in the display. To fastforward the tape, push the Preset 2(FF) side of the preset bar. You willsee FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-tem out of rewind or fast forward.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it reverses direction andbegins to play.

CONTINUED


Audio System


－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

191

REPEAT Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


The in-dash CD changer holds up tosix discs. You operate the CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. See page for CDchanger operation.

The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thecar’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset icons in theaudio display allow you to easilyselect your favorite stations.

193

177

AM/FM/CD ChangerAudio System


Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE/MODEKNOB

SEEK BAR

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

UPPERDISPLAY

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

PRESETICONS


－－The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pressing the PWR/VOL knob, the AM/FM button, orthe AUDIO DISPLAY button. Adjustthe volume by turning the knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will beseen in the upper display if thestation is broadcasting in stereo.Stereo reproduction on AM is notavailable.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset icons.

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob to the right to tune toa higher frequency, or to the left totune to a lower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar ( or ), thenrelease it. Depending on which sideof the SEEK bar you press, thesystem scans upward or downwardfrom the current frequency. It stopswhen it finds a station with a strongsignal.

Operating the Radio TUNE SEEK

Audio System


－－





The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, push and release theSCAN button on the driver’s side ofthe audio display or touch the SCANicon at the bottom of the display.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan up the band fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for approximately fiveseconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then scan for the nextstrong station and play that for fiveseconds. When it plays a station thatyou want to continue listening to,press the SCAN button or touch theSCAN icon again.

Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the audio display. You willsee the six preset icons.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each preseticon.

Pick the preset icon you want forthat station. Touch the icon, andhold it until you hear a beep.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply touch the proper preset iconto tune to it.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset icons. Eachicon will store one frequency on theAM band, and two frequencies onthe FM band.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Audio System


SCAN Preset


－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, touch theAuto Select icon on the display. TheA.SEL indicator will flash in theupper display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset icons. You canthen use the preset icons to selectthose stations.If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will not see astation number on the correspondingpreset icon.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the preset icons.Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset icons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by touching theAUTO SELECT icon. The preseticons will then select the frequenciesyou originally set.

AUTO SELECT

Audio System


TUNE KNOB

A. SEL INDICATORAM/FM BUTTON

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

PWR/VOL KNOB

AUTO SELECT(A. SEL) ICON

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

PRESET ICONS

SCAN ICON


－

－

To adjust the bassand treble, touch the or

arrows next to the BASS orTRE icons. The adjustment barabove each button shows you thecurrent setting.


To see the audio screen when youare finished adjusting the sound,touch the RETURN icon or wait fiveseconds.

To adjust the balance, touch the leftor right arrows on the sound grid.When you touch an arrow, the pinkbars on the grid move toward it,changing the balance left or right. Toequalize the balance, touch the left

or right arrow until each side has apink bar at the center of the soundgrid.

To adjust the fader, touch the frontor rear arrows on the sound grid.When you touch an arrow, the bluebars on the grid move toward it,changing the fader to the front or

rear. To equalize the fader, touch thefront or rear arrow until each sidehas a blue bar at the center of thesound grid.

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. To adjust them,enter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display orpressing the TUNE knob.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Audio System


TUNE/MODE KNOB

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

SOUND GRID

BASS ADJUSTICONS

TREBLE ADJUSTICONS

FADER ADJUSTICONS

BALANCE ADJUSTICONS

RETURN ICON


If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

To return to the previous display,push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonagain.

The upper display shows the timewhen the ignition switch is inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Refer tothe Navigation System Owner’sManual to set up the time.

Audio System


Digital Clock

174

DIGITAL CLOCK

SOUND ICON

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY


Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

CONTINUED

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Audio System


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


Your Honda’s audio system has anin-dash CD changer that holds up tosix discs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio.

To load CDs or operate the CDchanger, the ignition switch must bein ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

Load and play only standard rounddiscs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam inthe drive or cause other problems.You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.


CONTINUED

Operating the CD Changer

Audio System


LOAD BUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

CD LOADINDICATOR

UPPER DISPLAY


To load multiple CDs in oneoperation:

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last CD loaded.

To load a single CD:

Press and hold the LOAD buttonuntil you hear a beep and see‘‘LOAd’’ in the upper display, thenrelease the button.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The system will load the CD, andbegin playing it.

If you stop loading CDs before all sixpositions are filled, the system willwait for ten seconds, then stop theload operation and begin playing thelast CD loaded.

Insert the disc into the CD slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in thedisplay. The CD load indicatorturns red and blinks as the CD isloaded.

When ‘‘LOAd’’ appears again inthe display, insert the next discinto the CD slot.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and thegreen CD load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in theupper display, insert the disc intothe CD slot. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

Loading CDs in the Changer

Audio System


－

If you press the LOAD button whilea CD is playing, the system will stopplaying that CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bytouching the appropriate disc icon.Select an empty position (the discicon below the disc number is dark),and touch the icon for that position(1 6). The system will stop playingthe current CD and start the loadingsequence. It will then play the CDjust loaded.

CONTINUED

Audio System


DISC NUMBER

CD LOAD INDICATOR

EJECTBUTTON

DISC BAR

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

CD SLOT

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

DISC ICONS


－

Select the CD changer by pressingthe CD/AUX button. You will see‘‘CD’’ in the upper display. Thesystem will begin playing the lastselected disc in the CD changer. Youwill see the disc and track numbersdisplayed.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe CD changer is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

To select a different disc, touch theappropriate disc icon (1 6) orpress the DISC bar next to the audiodisplay. If you select an emptyposition in the CD changer, thesystem will go into the loadingsequence (see page ).

You can use the SKIP bar while adisc is playing to select passages andchange tracks.

Each time you press and release thetop of the SKIP bar, the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release thebottom to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the top or bottom of theSKIP bar. You will hear a beep andthe system will continue to movethrough the track. Press tomove forward, or to movebackward. Release the bar when thesystem reaches the point you want.

178

Operation

Audio System


CONTINUED

When you touch the TRACK SCANicon on the audio display or press theSCAN button next to the display, thefirst track of the current CD playsabout 10 seconds. You will seeTRACK SCAN in the display (orSCAN in the upper display). To hearthe rest of the track, touch TRACKSCAN or press SCAN again, within10 seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next track, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthrough the rest of the tracks thesame way.

When you touch the DISC RPT iconon the audio display, the systemcontinuously replays the current CD.As a reminder, you will see DISCREPEAT in the display (or D-RPT inthe upper display). To turn thisfeature off, touch Disc RPT again.

When you touch the RANDOM iconon the audio display, the systemplays the tracks of the current CD inrandom order, rather than in theorder they were recorded. As areminder, you will see TRACKRANDOM in the display (or RDM inthe upper display). To turn thisfeature off, touch RANDOM again,or select a different CD with one ofthe disc icons.

When you touch the TRACK RPTicon on the audio display, the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. As a reminder, you will seeTRACK REPEAT in the display (orRPT in the upper display). To turnthis feature off, touch TRACKREPEAT again.

When you touch the DISC SCANicon on the audio display, the firsttrack of the current CD plays about10 seconds. You will see DISC SCANin the display (or D-SCAN in theupper display). To hear the rest ofthe CD, touch DISC SCAN again,within 10 seconds. If you don’t, thesystem advances to the next CD,plays about 10 seconds of it, andcontinues through the rest of theCDs the same way.

Audio System


Track Scan Disc Repeat

Random Play

Track Repeat

Disc Scan


To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button. Each timeyou press the AM/FM button, thesystem changes to the next mode(AM, FM1, or FM2). When youreturn to CD mode by pressing theCD button, play will continue at thesame point that it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same point when youturn it back on.

Audio System


CDBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB


To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. Whenyou remove the disc from the slot,the system automatically begins theload sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot load another CD, after 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode (AM,/FM1, or FM2).

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put the CDchanger in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate disc icon or the DISC bar.When that CD begins playing, pressthe eject button.

CONTINUED

Removing CDs from the Changer

Audio System


CDBUTTON

DISC BAR

EJECTBUTTON



.

If you press the eject button whilelistening to the radio, or with theaudio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the CDs from the changer.

In any mode, if you press the ejectbutton and hold it until you hear abeep, the system will eject all of thediscs in the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off by pressing theeject button. The disc that was lastselected is ejected first. You caneject up to five discs, one at a time.

186


Audio System


IndicationIf you see an error indication in theupper display while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

SolutionCause

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error


Audio System


Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.


Audio System


＊

＊



2



CONTINUED


Audio System


PWR/VOLKNOB

CD/AUXBUTTON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATORRPT INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

AM/FMBUTTON

CH/DISCBAR

RPT ICON NR ICONPROG ICON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON


▲

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, push the AUDIODISPLAY button to change to theaudio display, and touch the PROGicon.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, push the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton to change to the audio display,and turn it off by touching the NRicon on the display.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the icon again.


If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pushthe AUDIO DISPLAY button tochange to the audio display, andtouch the PROG icon.


Audio System


－－

▲

▼

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.


side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will be shown inthe upper display as the tape moves.When the system reaches thebeginning of the next song orpassage (FF), or the beginning ofthe current one (REW), it goes backto PLAY mode.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the upper side( ) of the CH DISC bar. You willsee REW in the display. To fast for-ward the tape, push the lower side( ) of the CH DISC bar. You willsee FF displayed. Press either side ofthe CH DISC bar or touch the PROGicon in the audio display to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it reverses direction andbegins to play.

CONTINUED


Audio System


－ The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the AUDIODISPLAY button to change to theaudio display, and touch the RPTicon in the display to activate it; youwill see RPT displayed in the upperdisplay as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by touching theicon again.

Audio System


REPEAT


The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ flashing on the display,press the TAPE eject button toremove the cassette from the unit.Make sure the tape is not damaged.If the cassette will not eject or theerror indication stays on after thecassette ejects, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ on the upper display,press the TAPE eject button toremove the cassette from the unit.Make sure the tape is not damaged.If the cassette will not eject or theerror indication stays on after thecassette ejects, take the car to yourHonda dealer.

On Audio system with NavigationSystem

On Audio systems without NavigationSystem and on DX and LX models

Caring for the Cassette Player

Audio System


▲ ▼

＋－Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push the CHbutton. You will see the disc andtrack number in the display.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM orCD (if a CD is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change station.Each time you press the button up( ) or down ( ), the system goesto the next preset station on theband you are listening to.

On all EX models and V6 models

Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON


－

Your car’s audio system will disableitself if it is disconnected fromelectrical power for any reason. Tomake it work again, the user mustenter a specific code using the presetbars or the TUNE knob. Becausethere are hundreds of numbercombinations possible, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

When all the digits in the code areentered correctly, the radio will startplaying.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for one hour beforetrying again.

If your car’s battery is disconnectedor goes dead, or the radio fuse isremoved, the audio system willdisable itself. If this happens, youwill see ‘‘ ’’/‘‘ ’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code.

If your car is equipped with anavigation system, press and releasethe TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’appears on the display.

If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,press and release the TUNE knobto store it.If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in yourcode, turn the TUNE knob left orright until the first digit isdisplayed. Press and release theTUNE knob to store it. Enter theremaining digits the same way.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) after the system beginsworking. Your original settings werelost when power was disconnected.

On EX and EX-V6 modelsTheft Protection

Audio System


With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Monitor on theinstrument panel (see page ), tosee if the doors and trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

The security system helps to protectyour car and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourcar or remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for two minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the two minutes haveelapsed, unlock either front doorwith the key or the remotetransmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemlight on the instrument panel startsblinking immediately to show youthe system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

60

On EX, all V6, and Canadian LX-Gmodels

Security System


SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT


Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN light on theinstrument panel comes on.

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the car underthose conditions.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Except for U.S. DX model Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.


Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The carwill return to the set cruising speed.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel comes on.

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. The car will accelerate.When you reach the desiredcruising speed, release the button.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button repeatedly. Eachtime you do this, your car willspeed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. The car will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your car will slow downabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton. The car will then maintainthe desired speed.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control


Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, theCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out and thecar will begin to slow down. You canuse the accelerator pedal in thenormal way.

The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light comeson, and the car will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Using theCruise Control

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON


If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour car’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

The HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem built into your car can beprogrammed to operate remotely-controlled devices around your home,such as garage doors, lighting, orhome security systems. It canreplace up to three remotetransmitters.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem, or would like information onhome products that can be operatedby the transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information, youshould contact the manufacturer ofthe equipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

On EX-V6 model Important Safety Precautions

Customer Assistance

General Information


HomeLink Wireless Control System


－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button onHomeLink at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

If you just tookdelivery of your car and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on HomeLink for about 20seconds, until the red light flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed toStep 1.

2.

3.

4.1.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLink



Before you begin


For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

The remote control you are trainingmay stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it. It shouldoperate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLink buttonyou just trained. If the red lightblinks for two seconds, then stayson, you have a rolling code garagedoor opener. You may be able toverify this with the manufacturer’sdocumentation. Go to ‘‘TrainingWith a Rolling Code System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.8.

7.

Canadian Owners: Training With a Rolling CodeSystem




－

－

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.(The same button you trained withthe ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.



201

TRAINING BUTTON





You should erase all three codesbefore selling the car.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

To train an already programmedHomeLink button to operate a newdevice:

To erase the codes stored in all threeHomeLink buttons, press and holdthe two outside buttons until the redlight begins to flash, then release thebuttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes




Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your car,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 204.........................................Gasoline . 204

.........Service Station Procedures . 204................Filling the Fuel Tank . 204

....................Opening the Hood . 206...............................Oil Check . 208

.........Engine Coolant Check . 210...............................Fuel Economy . 211

............................Car Condition . 211...........................Driving Habits . 211

...Accessories and Modifications . 212.............................Carrying Cargo . 214

Before Driving

Before Driving 203Information Provided by:

During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

Help assure your car’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the car, park withthat side closest to the servicestation pumps.In Canada, some gasolines contain

an octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your car’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are relined.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

1.

2.

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline Filling the Fuel Tank

Break-in Period, Gasoline, Service Station Procedures

204

Push


Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Your car has an on-board refuelingvapor recovery system to helpkeep fuel vapors from going intothe atmosphere. If the fuel nozzlekeeps clicking off even though thetank is not full, there may be aproblem with this system. Consultyour dealer.

3.

4.

5.

6.

349

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving 205

FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.


Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Standing in front of the car, putyour fingers under the front edgeof the hood to the right of center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

1. 2.

289

Opening the Hood


Before Driving206

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH


CONTINUED

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood near thecenter.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

3.3.6-cylinder models4-cylinder models

Before Driving


207

SUPPORT ROD


Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the car with fuel. Wait a fewminutes after turning the engine offbefore you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick.

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

1.

2.


Before Driving

Oil Check

208

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

DIPSTICK(Orange Handle)

DIPSTICK(Orange Loop)


CONTINUED

Insert it all the way back in its tube. Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

3. 4.

268


Before Driving

Adding Oil

209

6-cylinder models

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK



Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

272

265


Before Driving

Owner MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant Check

210

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models


A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

The condition of your car and yourdriving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your car accordingto the maintenance schedule. Thiswill keep it in top operating condition.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your car uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour car’s underside adds weight androlling resistance. Frequent cleaninghelps your fuel mileage and reducesthe chance of corrosion.

265

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Car Condition

Fuel Economy

Before Driving 211Information Provided by:

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Before installing any accessory:

Modifying your car, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your car unsafe. Before youmake any modifications or add anyaccessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has genuine Hondaaccessories that allow you topersonalize your car. Theseaccessories have been designed andapproved for your car, and arecovered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your car, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your car’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour car’s electrical system capacity,they can interfere with the operation

of your car, or even cause theairbags to deploy.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper car operation orperformance.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your car’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

213

353

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving212

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourcar’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.


If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag inflates, acup holder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the car andhurt someone.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Honda (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Honda dealer.

On models equipped with side airbags orside curtain airbags

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.


Your car has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour car’s handling, stability, andoperation, and make it unsafe.Before carrying any type of cargo, besure to read the following pages.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The trunk is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the backseat can be folded down to allow youto carry more cargo or longer items.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving214

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

TRUNK GLOVE BOXSEAT-BACK POCKET

REAR DOOR POCKET

CENTER POCKET


Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

The maximum load for your car is850 lbs (395 kg).

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around the carduring a crash.

Subtract the total from 850 lbs(395 kg).

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 215

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.


If you can carry any items on aroof rack, be sure the total weightof the rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Hondadealer for further information.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the car during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .52

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Top Carrier


This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour car, the braking system, theTraction Control System, and factsyou need if you are planning to tow atrailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 218.......................Starting the Engine . 219

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 220

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 221.....Recommended Shift Points . 222

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 222

..............Automatic Transmission . 222.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 223

................Shift Lever Positions . 223..............Engine Speed Limiter . 226

....................Shift Lock Release . 226...........................................Parking . 228

..............................Parking Tips . 228.....................The Braking System . 229

.............Brake Wear Indicators . 229...............Brake System Design . 230

.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 230Important Safety

.........................Reminders . 231........................ABS Indicator . 231

..............Traction Control System . 232...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 233

.........TCS Activation Indicator . 233...............Driving in Bad Weather . 235

...........................Towing a Trailer . 237

Driving

Driving 217Information Provided by:

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your car.

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

15

87

219

57

101

73

Preparing to Drive

Driving218Information Provided by:

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. START (III) does notfunction unless the clutch pedal isdepressed.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Automatic Transmission:

Manual Transmission:

Starting the Engine


Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

Starting the Engine


Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the car moving. Pushdown the clutch pedal, and pause fora few seconds before shifting intoReverse, or shift into one of theforward gears for a moment. Thisstops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Driving

5-speed Manual Transmission

221

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.


Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Your Honda’s transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

5-speed Manual Transmission, Automatic Transmission

Driving

Automatic TransmissionRecommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter


CONTINUED

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission. Avoidrapid acceleration and have the trans-mission checked by an authorizedHonda dealer as soon as possible.

This indicator between the tacho-meter and speedometer shows whichposition the shift lever is in.

3

3

3

3

Driving

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicator Shift Lever Positions

223

SHIFT LEVER


－

－

－

－

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Press the release buttonbefore shifting into Reverse fromNeutral.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the car forany reason. Press on the brake pedalwhen you are moving the shift leverfrom Neutral to another gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear (1 through 5) for your speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

226

Driving


Park (P)

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)


－－－ To shift to Second,press the release button on the sideof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop. Secondgives you more power when climbing,and increased engine braking whengoing down steep hills. Use secondgear when starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow. It will helpreduce wheelspin.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

For faster acceleration when in D orD, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

3

3

3

3

Second (2) First (1)Drive (D )


Driving

3


This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever.Use a small flat-tipped screwdriveror finger nail file to remove thecover. Carefully pry off the edgeof the cover.

1.

2.

3.


Driving

Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter

226

COVER


If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your car isdeveloping a problem. Have the carchecked by your Honda dealer.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

5.

6.

4.


Driving 227

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT


－

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your car. The indicator onthe instrument panel shows that theparking brake is not fully released; itdoes not indicate that the parkingbrake is firmly set. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly or yourcar may roll if it is parked on anincline.

If your car has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the car frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission making it easier tomove the shift lever out of Parkwhen you want to drive away.

If the car is facing uphill, turn thefront wheels away from the curb. Ifyou have a manual transmission, putit in first gear.

If the car is facing downhill, turn thefront wheels toward the curb. If youhave a manual transmission, put it inreverse gear.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Turn off the lights.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

On EX, LX-V6, and Canadian LX-Gmodels

Parking Tips

Driving

Parking


Your Honda is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving. Your brakes may sometimes squeal

or squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. They make avery audible ‘‘screeching.’’

The front disc brakes on all modelshave audible brake wear indicators.They are also on the rear brakes ofcars equipped with rear disc brakes(EX, EX-V6, and LX-V6 models) asstandard equipment.

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Brake Wear Indicators

The Braking System


this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe car (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your car has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the car continuesstraight ahead even though you turnthe steering wheel. The ABS helps toprevent lock-up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly; much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto car loading.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump thebrake pedal;

Brake System Design

The Braking System

Driving230

Front


such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your car to veer intooncoming traffic or off the road.

itonly helps with steering controlduring braking. You should alwaysmaintain a safe following distancefrom other vehicles.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-

lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your car as soon as possible.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel or

snow, than a car without anti-lock.Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between cars under thoseconditions.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your carrepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.59

351

On all LX-V6 and EX-V6 models

Important Safety Reminders

ABS Indicator

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop the car;

A car with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

The Braking System

Driving 231

ABS INDICATOR


Your Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces.

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS Activationindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your car’s whole brakingsystem and cannot prevent skiddingif you enter a corner too fast. It isstill your responsibility to drive atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.

When starting out or driving on aloose or slippery road surface, youmay notice that the car does notrespond to the accelerator in thesame way it does at other times. Thisis a sign TCS is activating. You willsee the TCS Activation indicatorlight flash.

The TCS indicator (see page )comes on and stays on when there isa problem with the TCS. The TCSActivation indicator will also come on.

You should still install winter tires onyour car during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with car. Exercise the samecaution in winter driving as youwould if your car was not equippedwith TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

60

334

On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models

Traction Control System

Driving232

TCS INDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR


The TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

It flashes when TCS is regulatingwheelspin.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the car.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS Activationlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSActivation indicator light comes onas a reminder. Pressing the switchagain turns the system back on.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the indicatorwill come on and stay on alongwith the TCS indicator.

CONTINUED

TCS ON/OFF Switch TCS Activation Indicator



The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the Brake System indicator, itindicates a problem in the brakesystem (see

on page ).

If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system by re-starting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the TCS inspected byyour Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the car without TCS.

231

58

ABS Indicator

Brake SystemIndicator



－

CONTINUED

Rain, fog, and snow conditionsrequire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your car well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in theseconditions.

Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your car longer toreact, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving

Driving Technique


－－Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep the wind-shield washer reservoir full of theproper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages and ).131125

Visibility Traction

Driving

Driving in Bad Weather


Your Honda has been designedprimarily to carry passengers andtheir cargo. You can use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your car’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Tongue Load:

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:


To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the car, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

The total weight of the car, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

(DX, LX)

(EX, EX-L)

(DX, LX)

on the front axle

on the rear axle(EX, EX-L)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

238

4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)

4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)

4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)

2,195 lbs (995 kg)

1,960 lbs (890 kg)

2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)

1,985 lbs (900 kg)

2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)

2,005 lbs (910 kg)

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your car andtrailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of your carand trailer carefully beforestarting to drive.


Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

The best way to confirm that car andtrailer weights are within limits is tohave them checked at a public scale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedcar and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Any hitch used on your car must beproperly bolted to the underbody.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into your car’shydraulic system. No matter howsuccessful it may seem, any attemptto attach trailer brakes to your car’shydraulic system will lower brakingeffectiveness and create a potentialhazard.

CONTINUED

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Hitches

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Checking Loads


Your car has a trailer lightingconnector in the trunk. Refer to thedrawing in this page for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

If you use a converter, you can getthe connector and pins that matewith the connector in your car fromyour Honda dealer.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between the carand the trailer.

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving240

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)


Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The car has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

The lights and brakes on your carand the trailer are workingproperly.

Your car tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

237 238

303Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer


When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.When climbing hills, closely watch

your temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect your car’shandling and performance, sodriving with a trailer requires somespecial driving skills and techniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your car, and it canhit or run over something the carmisses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the car in place bypressing on the accelerator, as thiscan cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for cars with trailers. Ifyou have an automatic transmission,use D position when towing a traileron level roads. D is the proper shiftlever position to use when towing atrailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘

’’ in the next column foradditional gear information.)

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

33

Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Drivingon Hills

Towing a Trailer


Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge car, keep a constant speed andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

bottom

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer


This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your car wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 246.Important Safety Precautions . 247

.................Maintenance Schedule . 248...Required Maintenance Record . 260

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 265..............................Fluid Locations . 266

......................................Engine Oil . 268..................................Adding Oil . 268

....................Recommended Oil . 268..............................Synthetic Oil . 269

....................................Additives . 270.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 270

.............................Cooling System . 272............Adding Engine Coolant . 272

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 275....................Windshield Washers . 279

.......................Transmission Fluid . 280Automatic

.........................Transmission . 2805-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 283................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 284

............................Brake System . 284...........................Clutch System . 285

..............................Power Steering . 285.....................Air Cleaner Element . 286

....................................Hood Latch . 289

....................................Spark Plugs . 289..............................Replacement . 289............................Specifications . 291

...........................................Battery . 294.................................Wiper Blades . 297

..............Air Conditioning System . 299..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 300

.......................................Drive Belt . 302....................................Timing Belt . 302

...............................................Tires . 303......................................Inflation . 303

..................................Inspection . 305..............................Maintenance . 305.............................Tire Rotation . 306

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 306......................Wheels and Tires . 307

..........................Winter Driving . 308.............................Snow Tires . 308............................Tire Chains . 308

.............................................Lights . 310........................Replacing Bulbs . 312

...........................Storing Your Car . 323

381

Maintenance

Maintenance 245Information Provided by:

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Regularly maintaining your car is thebest way to protect your investment.Proper maintenance is essential toyour safety and the safety of yourpassengers. It will also reward youwith more economical, trouble-freedriving and help reduce air pollution.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance246

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining this caror failing to correct a problembefore driving can cause acrash in which you can beseriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.


Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your car is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.


－

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have your carserviced and what things needattention. It is essential that you haveyour car serviced as scheduled toretain its high level of safety,dependability, and emissions controlperformance.

Avoid exceeding your car’s loadlimit. This puts excess stress onthe engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your car. The loadlimit is shown on the label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Operate your car on reasonableroads within the legal speed limit.

Drive your car regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).

The services and time or distanceintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourcar as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Service your car according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your carMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Extensive idling or long periods ofstop-and-go driving, such as a taxior a commercial delivery vehicle.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

204

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

U.S. Owners


＃－

U.S. Cars:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your car best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of genuineHonda parts and fluids whenever youhave maintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Trailer towing, driving with a roofrack, or driving in mountainousconditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, ordeiced roads.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Canadian Owners


－

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

250

Visually inspect the following items:

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

Service at the indicated distanceor time whichever comes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsInspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)

At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

130208

140224

150240

160256

170272

180288

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

Inspect every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Rotate tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

7260 84 96 10812 24 36 48

M/TA/T

249::

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons


－－

□

□

□

□

□

□□

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□□

＃

＃

♯

CONTINUEDMaintenance

4-cylinder Models

251

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D, E

A

B

C

D

E

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

10,000 mi/16,000 km20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr30,000 mi/48,000 km40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs50,000 mi/80,000 km3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs70,000 mi/112,000 km80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs110,000 mi/176,000 km6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs,then replace every 60,000mi/96,000 km/5 yrsEvery 120,000 mi/192,000 km/6yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrsthen replace every 90,000mi/144,000 km/5 yrs130,000 mi/208,000 km140,000 mi/224,000 km/7 yrs150,000 mi/240,000 km160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs170,000 mi/272,000 km9 yrs180,000 mi/288,000 km, thenreplace every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs180,000 mi/288,000 km/9 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, D.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine coolant.

Replace manual transmission fluid.

Replace automatic transmission fluid.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, E.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant.

Do items in A, B, C.

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 306).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect drive belt.Replace air cleaner element.Replace dust and pollen filter.Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs.Inspect idle speed.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

NOTE:

248

:249

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)


－

＃＊

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

252




Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls, vehicle underbody

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisyEvery 110,000 miles (176,000 km)

See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)



1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

70112

80128

100160

110176

130208

140224

160256

170272

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 monthsEvery 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

Inspect every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years

Inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

Lubricate every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 yearRotate tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year

6096

90144

120192

150240

180288

At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years


Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsInspect drive beltInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluid

Inspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks, and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)

7260 84 96 10812 24 36 48

M/TA/T

249:: 300

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons


－－

□

□

□

□

□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□□

＃

＃

＊

＊

＃

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

253

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H


Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

5,000 mi/8,000 km10,000 mi/16,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr25,000 mi/40,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km35,000 mi/56,000 km40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km50,000 mi/80,000 km55,000 mi/88,000 km3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs,then replace every 30,000mi/48,000 km/2yrs65,000 mi/104,000 km70,000 mi/112,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs85,000 mi/136,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km90,000 mi/144,000 km, thenreplace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs95,000 mi/152,000 km100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs105,000 mi/168,000 km110,000 mi/176,000 km115,000 mi/184,000 km6 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs

Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C, D, E, F.


Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C, E.


Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, G.Do item in A.


Replace engine oil.Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 306).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect drive shaft boots.Replace air cleaner element.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Inspect drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter .Replace transmission fluid (M/T).Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs.Inspect idle speed.

248

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.

:

:249

300

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)


□

□

□

□

□

□

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

254


NOTE:120,000 mi/192,000 km, thenreplace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs,then replace every 60,000mi/96,000 km/5 yrs125,000 mi/200,000 km130,000 mi/208,000 km135,000 mi/216,000 km140,000 mi/224,000 km/7 yrs145,000 mi/232,000 km150,000 mi/240,000 km150,000 mi/240,000 km, thenreplace 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs155,000 mi/248,000 km160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs165,000 mi/264,000 km170,000 mi/272,000 km175,000 mi/280,000 km9 yrs180,000 mi/288,000 km/9 yrs180,000 mi/288,000 km, thenreplace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs180,000 mi/288,000 km, thenreplace every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs



Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B, D.Do item in A.Do item in A, B, C, E.


Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D, H.Do items in A, C.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.




Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)


－

＃

＃

＃

CONTINUED

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance 255





Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)


152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296


Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pumpInspect drive beltReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years

:

A/T

249

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns


－－

□

□

□

□

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□□□

＃

＃

♯

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance256

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D

A

B

C

D


Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs,then replace every 60,000mi/96,000 km/5 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs,then replace every 90,000mi/144,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, D.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.



Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 306).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Inspect drive belt.Replace air cleaner element.Replace dust and pollen filter.Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs.Replace timing belt and inspect water pump.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .


248

NOTE:

:249

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)


－

＃＊＊

＊

＊

＃

＃

CONTINUED

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance 257




Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop


Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

Replace engine oil, and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pumpInspect drive beltReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition atleast once per month)

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls, vehicle underbody

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 monthsEvery 3 years (independent of mileage)


Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

:1:2:

A/T

300

249302

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns


－－

□

□

□□□□□□

□□□□□□□□□□□□□□

＃

＃

♯ ＊

＊

＃

＊

＊

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance258

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A, B, C, D, E

A

B

C

D

E


3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km56,250 mi/90,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs,then replace every 30,000mi/48,000 km/2 yrs63,750 mi/102,000 km67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs78,750 mi/126,000 km

Do item in A.Do items in A, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, E.Do item in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Do items in A, B, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, D, E.


Do item in A.Do items in A, E.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, E.Do item in A.

Replace engine oil and oil filter.Replace air cleaner element.Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.

Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Replace spark plugs.Inspect valve clearance.Replace timing belt and inspect water pump.

Inspect drive belt.Replace dust and pollen filter .Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 306).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect drive shaft boots.

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.248

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .See timing belt on page for replacement information underspecial driving conditions.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacementinformation under special driving conditions.


NOTE:

:

1:

2:

249302

300

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)


□□

□

□

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance 259


NOTE:Do items in A, E.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace automatic transmission fluid.

Do items in A, B, D, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, B ,C, E.Do items in A.Do items in A, E.Do items in A.



Do items in A, B, D, E.

82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km, thenreplace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs,then replace every 60,000mi/96,000 km/5 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km, thenreplace every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)


Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

Maintenance260

3,750 mi

5,000 mi

7,500 mi

10,000 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

20,000 mi

22,250 mi

25,000 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

35,000 mi

37,500 mi

40,000 mi

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (pages , ) orsevere conditions (pages , ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.

6,000 km

8,000 km

12,000 km

16,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

32,000 km

36,000 km

40,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

54,000 km

56,000 km

60,000 km

64,000 km

250 255257252


CONTINUED


Maintenance 261

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

50,000 mi

52,500 mi

55,000 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

63,750 mi

65,000 mi

67,500 mi

70,000 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

80,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

80,000 km

84,000 km

88,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km

102,000 km

104,000 km

108,000 km

112,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

128,000 km



Maintenance262

82,500 mi

85,000 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

95,000 mi

97,500 mi

100,000 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

110,000 mi

112,500 mi

115,000 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stampmi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

132,000 km

136,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km

150,000 km

152,000 km

156,000 km

166,000 km

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

176,000 km

180,000 km

184,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km


CONTINUED


Maintenance 263

123,750 mi

125,000 mi

127,500 mi

130,000 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

140,000 mi

142,500 mi

145,000 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

153,750 mi

155,000 mi

157,500 mi

160,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stampmi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

198,000 km

200,000 km

204,000 km

208,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

224,000 km

228,000 km

232,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km

246,000 km

248,000 km

252,000 km

256,000 km



Maintenance264

161,250 mi

165,000 mi

168,750 mi

170,000 mi

172,500 mi

175,000 mi

176,250 mi

180,000 mi


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

258,000 km

264,000 km

270,000 km

272,000 km

276,000 km

280,000 km

282,000 km

288,000 km


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

and .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

208

210

279

280

284

303

310

281

Owner Maintenance Checks


4-cylinder Models

Maintenance

Fluid Locations

266

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR


6-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

Maintenance 267

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)


To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Pour the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Oil is major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your car for aslong as you own it.

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance268

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

6-cylinder models4-cylinder models


Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ You may use a synthetic motor oil if

it meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your car accordingto this chart.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 269

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature


Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the car. The car shouldbe raised on a service station-typehydraulic lift for this service. Unlessyou have the knowledge and properequipment, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

1.Changing the Oil and FilterAdditives

Engine Oil

Maintenance270Information Provided by:

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

4.

5.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Engine Oil

Maintenance 271

WASHER

4-cylinder models

WASHER

6-cylinder models

OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models

OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)


Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

9.

8.

7.

6.

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Oil, Cooling System

Maintenance272

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.


Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing. If it is not available, you mayuse another major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in

corrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Cooling System

Maintenance 273

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

RADIATOR CAP

4-cylinder modelsRemoving the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.


The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled coolantcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your car’s coolingsystem. They may not be compatiblewith the coolant or engine compo-nents.

4.

5.

6.

Cooling System

Maintenance274

4-cylinder models6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models


The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Use of any non-Honda coolant or plain water canresult in corrosion and deposits inthe cooling system.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the car. Unlessyou have the tools and knowledge,you should have this maintenancedone by a skilled mechanic.

Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe temperature control dial all theway clockwise. Turn off theignition and remove the key.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Makesure the DUAL indicator is off.Turn the temperature control dialto 90°F (32°C). Turn off theignition and remove the key.

Remove the radiator cap.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On cars with Manual A/C

On car with AUTO A/C

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 275



Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Drain the coolantinto an appropriate container.

Remove the reserve tankmounting bolt with a wrench.

3. 4.

Maintenance

Cooling System

276

4-cylinder models

DRAINPLUG

DRAIN PLUG

6-cylinder models

MOUNTINGBOLT

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

RESERVETANK CAP

HOLDERS


Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant, then put thetank back in its holder. Install themounting bolt.

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

5.

6.

7.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Cooling System

277

4-cylinder models

RESERVETANK CAP

RESERVETANK

6-cylinder models HOLDERS

MOUNTINGBOLT

FILLER NECK

Fill up to here

FILLER NECK

6-cylinder models Fill up to here


The cooling system capacity is: Start the engine and let it run forabout 30 seconds. Then turn offthe engine.

Fill the radiator with coolant up tothe base of the filler neck.

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Pourcoolant into the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck and into thereserve tank up to the MAX mark.

Start the engine and hold it at1,500 rpm until the cooling fancomes on. Turn off the engine.Check the coolant level in theradiator and add coolant if needed.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

If necessary, fill the reserve tankto the MAX mark. Install thereserve tank cap.

8.

9.

10.

16.

15.

14.

11.

12.

13.

With 5-speed manual transmission:

With automatic transmission:

6-cylinder models

Cooling System

Maintenance278

1.35 US gal (5.1 )

1.32 US gal (5.0 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )


Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal usage. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the right headlight.

62

Canadian Models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance 279

LEVEL GAUGE


LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,while a vinegar/water solution candamage the windshield washer pump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.


Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it is notavailable, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

4-cylinder modelsAutomatic Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance280

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK


6-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the car on level ground. Shutoff the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thecar a short distance. Do this threetimes. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

1.

2.

6.

CONTINUED


Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 281

DIPSTICK


If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark. Alwaysuse Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid). If it is notavailable, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thecar a short distance. Do this threetimes. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

5.

3.

4.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance282

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK


If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.


If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the car sitting onlevel ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda Manual Transmis-sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts torun out of the hole. Reinstall thefiller bolt and tighten it securely.

6. 5-speed Manual Transmission

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 283

FILLER BOLT

Correct level


The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the reser-voirs monthly. There are up to tworeservoirs, depending on the model.They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your car’s brakingsystem and can cause extensivedamage.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Brake System

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance284

MAX

MIN


The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

CONTINUED

Clutch System Power Steering

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering

Maintenance 285

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models


The air cleaner element should becleaned or replaced according to thetime and distance recommendationsin the maintenance schedule.

Clean the air cleaner element byblowing compressed air through it inthe opposite direction to normal airflow. If you do not have access tocompressed air (such as a servicestation), ask your Honda dealer to dothis service.

Follow the replacement procedurefor removal and reinstallation.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Air Cleaner Element

Cleaning (Severe Conditions)

Power Steering, Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance286

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.


Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Loosen the four bolts, and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the four bolts.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

To replace it:

1.

3.

4.

5.2.

CONTINUED

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 287

BOLTS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT


Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the four bolts.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

To replace it:

Disconnect the hose from the aircleaner housing cover with flat-tipped screwdriver.

Loosen the four bolts, and removethe air cleaner housing cover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

Connect the hose to the aircleaner housing cover with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

1.

3.

4.

5.

2.6.

7.

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element (6-cylinder Models)

Maintenance288

BOLTS

AIR CLEANER ELEMENTHOSE


Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

Remove the four nuts with awrench, then remove the coilcover.

The spark plugs in your car are aspecial iridium-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

1.

CONTINUED

ReplacementSpark PlugsHood Latch

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 289

PIVOTS

LATCH ASSEMBLY

NUTS NUTS

COIL COVER


Clean up any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Use a wrench to remove the boltholding the ignition coil. Pull theignition coil up slightly.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the ignition coil.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

5.2.

4.

3.6.

7.

8.

Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)

Maintenance290

BOLT CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL

LOCK TAB

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)


Install the ignition coil into thehole.

Connect the wire connector to theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Push the ignition coil down all theway. Install the bolt.

Repeat this procedure for theother three spark plugs.

Reinstall the coil cover, andtighten the four nuts.

The spark plugs in your car are aspecial iridium-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the distancerecommendation in the maintenanceschedule.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

NGK:DENSO:

NGK:DENSO:

On some models

CONTINUED

Specifications: Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)

Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models), Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)

Maintenance 291

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11


Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.


Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

Clean off any dirt and oil that hascollected around the ignition coil.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

Replacement


Maintenance292

HOLDING CLIP

CONNECTOR

HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLTIGNITION COIL


Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

NGK:DENSO:

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Specifications:


Maintenance 293

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)


Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.


Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

Check the condition of your car’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Battery

Maintenance294

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

4-cylinder models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

6-cylinder models


－

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the car’selectrical system.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

Battery

Maintenance 295



Battery

Maintenance296

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourcar’s electronic controls. Detach thebattery cables bef ore connecting thebattery to a charger.


Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace the blade:

Raise the driver’s side first, thenthe passenger’s side.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 297

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB


Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the passenger’s side first,then the driver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance298

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT


Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Your car’s air conditioning is a sealedsystem. Any major maintenance,such as recharging, should be doneby a qualified mechanic. You can doa couple of things to make sure theair conditioning works efficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

364

Optional for U.S. DX models

Air Conditioning System

Maintenance 299

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.


The dust and pollen filter is locatedbehind the glove box.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system becomesless than usual.

Open the glove box.

To replace it:

Push the stop on the right side ofthe glove box to detach it from theglove box.

Pivot the glove box out of the way.

1.

3.

2.Replacement

Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance300

STOP


Push in the tabs on the corners ofthe dust and pollen filter case. Pullout the case.

Remove the filter from the case.

Install the new filter in the case.Make sure the arrows of the ‘‘AIRFLOW’’ marks on the filter pointto the air flow direction(downward).

Install the case. Make sure bothtabs ‘‘click’’ into place.

Install the glove box stop, andclose the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replacethe dust and pollen filter, have itreplaced by your Honda dealer.

5.

6.

7.

8.

4.

Dust and Pollen Filter


－－

An auto-tensioner adjusts the tensionof the drive belt. The pointer on theauto-tensioner should be in theproper range. It should be checkedaccording to the time and distancerecommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Take your car to a Honda dealer toreplace the drive belt.

If the pointer is out of this range oryou see signs of wear, have the drivebelt replaced by your Honda dealeras soon as possible.

Check the condition of the drive belt.Examine the edges of the belt forcracks or fraying.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your car in one ormore of these conditions:

The timing belt and balancer beltshould normally be replaced at theintervals shown in the maintenanceschedule.6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models onlyTiming BeltDrive Belt

Maintenance

Drive Belt, Timing Belt

302

4-cylinder models


Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the carhas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive the carbefore checking the tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make your carride more harshly, are more prone todamage from road hazards, and wearunevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your car, your tiresmust be the proper type and size, ingood condition with adequate tread,and correctly inflated. The followingpages give more detailed informationon how and when to check airpressure, how to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

CONTINUED

Inflation

Tires

Maintenance 303

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.


＊＊

＊

＊

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the car has been drivenseveral miles), you will see readings4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

LX model

All models except LXTire Size Cold Tire Pressure

for Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

12

DX model

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

EX and V6 models

1

2

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Tires

Maintenance304

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P205/65R15 92H

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

P205/60R16 91VP195/65R15 89H


Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

Your car’s tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

CONTINUED

Inspection Maintenance

Tires

Maintenance 305

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS


When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,

they should be rotated only front-to-back.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your car’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

The tires that came with your carwere selected to match the perform-ance capabilities of the car whileproviding the best combination ofhandling, ride comfort, and long life.You should replace them with radialtires of the same size, load range,speed rating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your car can reduceits braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every10,000 miles (16,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

(U.S. LX, EX and EX-V6 models)

Tire Rotation

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Maintenance

Tires

306

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)Improper wheel weights can damage

your car’s aluminum wheels. Use onlyHonda wheel weights f or balancing.


It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your car’s handling.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the car. Tire size andconstruction can affect wheel speedand may cause the system to work

inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your car. Replacementwheels are available at your Hondadealer.

Wheel:

Tire:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.DX and LX models

All EX models

LX-V6 model

LX model

All EX and V6 models

DX model

367Wheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance 307

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

P195/65R15 89H

16 x 6 1/2 JJ (Aluminum wheelsonly)

P205/65R15 92H

P205/60R16 91V

16 x 6 1/2 JJ (Steel wheels only)

Installing improper tires on yourcar can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.


＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour car’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your car’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your car has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1130Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

DX

LX

EX and V6

Winter Driving Snow Tires Tire Chains

Maintenance

Tires


If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

These chains are the only ones thathave been approved by Honda foruse on your car. Since Honda cannottest all chains, you must bepersonally responsible for properselection, installation, and use ofsnow chains.

The chains listed here are availableat many auto supply stores. For acomplete list of stores, visit the SCCwebsite at www.scc-chain.com.When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed.

Tires

Maintenance 309

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.


Check the operation of your car’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourcar’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance310

HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LIGHT

LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT


Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

365

Lights

Maintenance 311

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

TAILLIGHT

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BACK-UP LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

STOP/TAILLIGHT


The headlights were properly aimedwhen your car was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustment of theheadlights should be performed by aHonda technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Your car has two bulbs on each side,four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your car uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Lights

Maintenance312

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.


Open the hood. If you need tochange a bulb on the passenger’sside, undo the two fasteners andremove the air intake cover.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

1. 3.2.

4.

CONTINUED

High Beam Headlight

Lights

Maintenance 313

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models TAB

BULBAIR INTAKECOVER

AIR INTAKECOVER

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models


Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

(Passenger’s side) Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

If you are changing the bulb onthe passenger’s side, start theengine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the left, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the driver’s side, turn thesteering wheel to the right.

6.

7.

5. 3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

Low Beam Headlight

Lights

Maintenance314

HOLDING CLIPS

TAB

BULB

6-cylinder models


Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.

If you are changing the bulb onthe passenger’s side, start theengine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the left, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the driver’s side, turn thesteering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clips from theinner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1. 3.

2.

4.

9.

8.

7.

6.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs

Lights

Maintenance 315

HOLDING CLIPS


Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning the bulb counterclockwiseuntil it unlocks.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the holding clips. Lock eachone in place by pushing on thecenter.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance316Information Provided by:

Open the trunk.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight or turnsignal.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Install the light assembly cover.Make sure it snaps into place.

1.

3.

2. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

Lights

Maintenance 317

BULBS

COVER

SOCKETS


Open the trunk.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pulling it straight outof its socket.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

Carefully bend back the corner ofthe trunk lid trim to expose thebulbs.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly.Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.Press the trim clip back into itshole.

Remove the trim clips from theright or left corner of the trunk lidtrim by carefully prying themusing a small, flat-tip screwdriverwrapped with tape.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.8.

9.

10.

11.

6-cylinder models

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

Maintenance318

TRIM CLIPS BULBSSOCKETS

BULBS

SOCKETS


Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket. Make sure the newbulb is working.

Remove the license light assemblyby carefully prying on the leftedge of the lens with a flat-tipscrewdriver and pulling theassembly out.

Remove the lens from the bulbholder by pulling the lens whilesqueezing the tabs on both sidesof the holder.

1.

2.

3.

1. 2.

CONTINUED

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

Lights

Maintenance 319

LENS

BULBBULBSOCKET

HOLDERLENS


Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

The ceiling light, door light andvanity mirror light come apart thesame way, but they do not use thesame type of bulb.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Put the lens back on the bulbholder and push it until it latches.

Slide the left side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe right side to latch theassembly into place.

Ceiling light:Pry on the front edge of the lensnear both sides.

Door light:

Pry on the top left or right of thelens.

Spotlights:

Pry on the inner edge of bothspotlights.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Carefully snap the lens backin place.

1.

4.

5.

2.

3.

3.

6.

Not available on DX model

Not available on DX model

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

Lights

Maintenance320

CEILING LIGHT

BULB


On all models except DX On all models except DXOn LX models

On EX models

Lights

Maintenance 321

BULBS

BULB

BULBS

DOOR COURTESY LIGHT

SPOTLIGHTS

SPOTLIGHTS VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

BULBS


Open the trunk. Pull down theright side of the trunk lightassembly.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs.

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the assembly back in place.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance322

TRUNK LIGHT

BULB


Block the rear wheels.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If you need to park your car for anextended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your car back on the road. Ifpossible, store your car indoors.

If the car is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe car is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply a carbody wax to the painted surfacesthat mate with the door and trunkseals.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

If you store your car for 1 year orlonger, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections as soon asyou take it out of storage (see pages

, ). The 6-cylinder modelneeds the inspections called for inthe 2 years/30,000 miles (48,000 km)maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) and the 4-cylinder modelneeds the inspections called for inthe 2 years/40,000 miles (64,000 km)maintenance schedule (NormalConditions). The replacementscalled for in the maintenanceschedule are not needed unless thecar has actually reached that time ormileage.

Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’cover, one made from a porousmaterial such as cotton.

Nonporous materials, such asplastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

270 250 255

Storing Your Car


Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives you hintson how to clean your car andpreserve its appearance: the paint,brightwork, wheels and interior. Alsoincluded are several things you cando to help prevent corrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 326.....................................Washing . 326

.......................................Waxing . 327....................Aluminum Wheels . 327

..........................Paint Touch-up . 327..................................Interior Care . 328...................................Carpeting . 328.................................Floor Mats . 328

.........................................Fabric . 329...........................................Vinyl . 329

.......................................Leather . 329...................................Seat Belts . 329....................................Windows . 330

..........................Air Fresheners . 330....................Corrosion Protection . 331

.................................Body Repairs . 332

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 325Information Provided by:

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Frequent washing helps preserveyour car’s beauty. Dirt and grit canscratch the paint, while tree sap andbird droppings can permanently ruinthe finish.

Wash your car in a shady area, not indirect sunlight. If the car is parked inthe sun, move it into the shade andlet the exterior cool down before youstart.

Rinse the car thoroughly with coolwater to remove loose dirt.

As you dry the car, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Wash the car using the water anddetergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe car does not need waxing.

327

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

326

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your car.


－

－

Always wash and dry the whole carbefore waxing it. You should waxyour car, including the metal trim,whenever water sits on the surfacein large patches. It should form intobeads or droplets after waxing.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that removethe top layer of the finish. You

should use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the car does notneed waxing.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your car’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your car frequently for chipsor scratches in the paint. Repairthem right away to prevent corrosionof the metal underneath. Use thetouch-up paint only on small chipsand scratches. More extensive paintdamage should be repaired by aprofessional.

All EX models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Waxing

Aluminum Wheels

Paint Touch-up


Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you replace it, use a genuineHonda floor mat that is designed tobe used with the floor mat anchors inyour car.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The Honda driver’s floor mat thatcame with your car was designed tobe hooked over the floor mat anchor.This keeps the floor mat from slidingforward and possibly interfering withthe pedals.

If you remove the floor mat, makesure to re-anchor it when you put itback in your car.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Interior Care

Appearance Care328Information Provided by:

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the car.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

CONTINUED

On EX with leather and EX-V6 modelsFabric

Vinyl

Leather Seat Belts

Interior Care

Appearance Care 329

LOOP


Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of your car,it is best to use a solid type. Someliquid air fresheners contain chemi-cals that may cause parts of theinterior trim and fabric to crack ordiscolor.

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Windows Air Fresheners

330

The rear window def ogger andantenna wires are bonded to the insideof the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-down can dislodge and break thesewires. When cleaning the rear window,use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.


Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your car:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thecar stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the car.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your car from corrodingby performing some simple periodicmaintenance:

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourcar inspected and repairedperiodically.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your car. This isespecially important in areas thatuse road salt in winter. It is also agood idea in humid climates andareas subject to salt air. Be carefulnot to damage the ABS wheelsensors and wiring at each wheel.

1.

2.

Appearance Care

Corrosion Protection


Make sure the repair facility usesgenuine Honda replacement bodyparts. Some companies make sheetmetal pieces that seem to duplicatethe original Honda body parts, butare actually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant genuine Honda parts used inthe repair. Although most insurersrecognize the quality of originalparts, some may try to specify thatthe repairs be done with otheravailable parts. You should investi-gate this before any repairs havebegun.

Body repairs can affect your car’sresistance to corrosion. If your carneeds repairs after a collision, payclose attention to the parts used inthe repair and the quality of thework.

Take your car to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care332Information Provided by:

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their cars. It givesyou information about how to safelyevaluate the problem and what to doto correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your car towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 334....................Changing a Flat Tire . 335

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 340Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 340The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 341

................................Jump Starting . 342............If Your Engine Overheats . 345

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 347..........Charging System Indicator . 348

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 349.......................Readiness Codes . 350

...............Brake System Indicator . 351..................Closing the Moonroof . 352

..............................................Fuses . 353..........Checking and Replacing . 354

......................Emergency Towing . 358

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 333Information Provided by:

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Your car has a compact spare tirethat takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your car as soon as you can.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour car. Do not use your sparetire on another car unless it is thesame make and model.

232

On all LX-V6 and EX-V6 models

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected334

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )


If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Park the car on firm, level andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark (automatic) or Reverse(manual). Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lightsand turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the car whileyou change the tire.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 335

TRUNK FLOOR

SPARE TIRE JACKTOOL KIT

The car can easily roll off thejack, seriously injuring anyoneunderneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the car when itis supported only by the jack.


Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

6. 7. 8.



336

JACK

WHEEL NUTS


CONTINUED

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise the caruntil the flat tire is off the ground.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Temporarily place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface of the wheel facing up.You could scratch the wheel if youput it face down.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

9. 10. 11.

U.S. DX and LX models:



JACKING POINT WHEEL WRENCH

EXTENSION


Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Lower the car to the ground andremove the jack.

12. 13. 14.



338

BRAKE HUB


Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

15. 16. 17.

18.

19.

CONTINUED

LX, EX, and EX-V6 models



WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

Fornormaltire

Forsparetire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)


Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

20.

21.

342


Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start

If Your Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

340

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.


Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the car froma booster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Your car has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

219

76

358

294

342

353

358

If Your Engine Won’t Start


Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing


Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: climate control, stereosystem, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

To jump start your car, follow thesedirections closely:

If your car’s battery has run down,you may be able to start the engineby using a booster battery. Althoughthis seems like a simple procedure,you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

1.

2.

294


Jump Starting

342

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.


－＋

＋

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting


4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models


Once your car is running, discon-nect the negative cable from yourcar, then from the booster battery.Disconnect the positive cable fromyour car, then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the car until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Start your car. If the starter motorstill operates slowly, check thejumper cable connections to makesure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

7.

6.

5.

Jump Starting


6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsBOOSTERBATTERY 6-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY


If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and coolingsystem and all other accessories.Turn on the hazard warningindicators.

The pointer of your car’s tempera-ture gauge should stay in the mid-range under most conditions. It maygo higher if you are driving up a longsteep hill on a very hot day. If itclimbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

Your car can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.


If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointer

reaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ). Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

210

358

358


If Your Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

EmergencyTowing

346

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.


This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the car sit for a minute. Openthe hood and check the oil level(see page ). Although oil leveland oil pressure are not directlyconnected, an engine that is verylow on oil can lose pressure duringcornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)1.

2.

3.

4.

208

268

358

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


EmergencyTowing

347

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe car stopped.


By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C, reardefogger, cruise control, etc. Try notto use other electrically-operatedcontrols such as the power windows.Keep the engine running and takeextra care not to stall it. Starting theengine will discharge the batteryrapidly.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.


Charging System Indicator

348

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR


If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the carchecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your car if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour car’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour car to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourcar, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your car’s emissions controlsand engine. Those repairs may not becovered by your car’s warranties.


If possible, do not take your car for astate emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. To check ifthey are set, turn the ignition ON (II),but do not start the engine. TheMalfunction Indicator Lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. See StateEmissions Testing on pages and

.

Your car has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your car’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

374375

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


Readiness Codes


＊

＊

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the car’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the car to yourdealer and have the brake systeminspected for leaks or worn brakepads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before the carbegins to slow down, and you willhave to press harder on the pedal.The distance needed to stop will bemuch longer.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the car. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If you must drive the car a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the car inspectedby your Honda dealer immediately.

284358

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown


Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually. 5.

6.

4.

3.

1.

2.

357


Closing the Moonroof


ROUND PLUG SOCKET


All the electrical circuits in your carhave fuses to protect them from ashort circuit or overload. Thesefuses are located in two fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, pull it toward youand take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

Fuses


INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB


Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

If something electrical in your carstops working, the first thing youshould check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check the component’soperation.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.

3.1.

2.

356 357

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses


BLOWN BLOWN


CONTINUED

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your car.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your car checkedby a qualified mechanic.

If you cannot drive the car withoutfixing the problem, and you do nothave a spare fuse, take a fuse of thesame rating or a lower rating fromone of the other circuits. Make sureyou can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

5.

6.

4.

Fuses


BLOWNFUSE PULLER

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.


－

－

＋

＊

＊

＊

＊

Circuits Protected Amps.Amps. No.No. Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.No.

: 6-cylinder models

Left Headlight Low(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight HiSmall LightRight Headlight Hi

10 A7.5 A15 A20 A

10 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A

6789

10

12345

Right Headlight LowBack UpFI ECUCondenser fanNot Used

Cooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorTCS MotorABS F/STCSHeated SeatsCondenser FanHeater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

20 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A

(40 A)40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

111112131415161717181819202122

23

Fuses


UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX


－

－

－

＊

＊

No.

No. No. Amps.Amps.

Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

: On Canadian models

131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

123456

789

101112

10 A20 A15 A7.5 A30 A

(15 A)15 A

(10 A)15 A10 A7.5 A

(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

(20 A)

7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A

Driver’s Power Seat SlideHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat Recline

IG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Left Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowRight Front Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCHAC OP

Back-Up LightsDoor LockFront Accessory SocketsIG OPDSIG WiperNot Used

Drive by WireIgnition CoilDay LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior Light

Passenger’s Power Seat Recline

Passenger’s Power Seat Slide

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOX


－

－

－

Automatic Transmission:

5-speed Manual Transmission:

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your car on the back of a truck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the car offthe ground. Your car’s suspensionand body can be seriously damaged.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If due todamage, your car must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the car no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your car needs to be towed, call aprofessional towing service or, if youbelong to one, an organization thatprovides roadside assistance. Nevertow your car behind another vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

Sling-type Equipment

This is the best way to transportyour Honda.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

This method of towing isunacceptable.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourcar must be transported with the f rontwheels of f the ground.


If you decide to tow your car with allfour wheels on the ground, makesure you use a properly-designed andattached tow bar. Prepare the car fortowing as described above, and leavethe ignition switch in Accessory (I)so the steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your car by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the car’s weight.


The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your car’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 362................................Specifications . 364

DOT Tire Quality Grading............................(U. S. Cars) . 367

.................................Treadwear . 367......................................Traction . 367

.............................Temperature . 368

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 369......Driving in Foreign Countries . 370

.......................Emissions Controls . 371.....................The Clean Air Act . 371

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 371

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 371

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 371

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 372....................PGM-FI System . 372

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 372

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 372

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 372

....................Replacement Parts . 372..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 373

..............State Emissions Testing . 374

Technical Information

Technical Information 361Information Provided by:

Your car has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourcar for warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour car. The easiest place to findthe VIN is on a plate fastened to thetop of the dashboard. You can see itby looking through the windshieldon the driver’s side. It is also on theCertification label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb, and is stamped onthe engine compartment bulkhead.The VIN is also provided in bar codeon the Certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information362

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL


The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers


4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

363

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINENUMBER


－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Capacities

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Dimensions

1.35 US gal (5.1 )1.32 US gal (5.0 )

1.90 US gal (7.2 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )2.2 US qt (2.1 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oilAutomatictransmissionfluid

Windshieldwasherreservoir

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

1.88 US gal (7.1 )2.22 US gal (8.4 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

3.0 US qt (2.8 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )7.6 US qt (7.2 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

189.5 in (4,813 mm)71.7 in (1,820 mm)57.2 in (1,453 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)16 18 oz (450 500 g)

ND-OIL8

Refrigerant typeCharge quantity

Lubricant type

Fuel tank17.09 US gal (64.7 )

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

107.9 in (2,740 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

Approx.

FrontRear

1 : 6-cylinder models

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

Total

ChangeTotalChange

Total

U.S. CarsCanada Cars

2 :

3 :

2

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

1


－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Specifications

Technical Information 365

Fuses

Battery

Lights

Alignment

Engine

3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm )

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 24/2.2 CP

9.7 : 1

3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)

182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm )

10 : 1

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V12 V

21 W21/5 W3 CP21 W21 W3 CP8 W

Interior

Under-hood

52 AH/5 HR38 AH/5 HR12 V

12 VCapacity

12 V12 V12 V

1.1 W2 CP5 W

8 W8 W12 V

12 V

Headlights

Front turn signal/Front parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsSpotlights/Front ceiling lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightVanity mirror lights Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

See page 357 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 356 or the fuse boxcover.

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion pages 291 and 293 .

Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

4-cylinder6-cylinder

1 : LX2 : EX

(Amber)

3 : 6-cylinder models

3

3

3

1

2


＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

Specifications


Tires

T135/90D15

P195/65R15 89H

P205/60R16 91VP205/65R15 92H

Size

Pressure30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

1 : DX2 : LX3 : All EX and V6 models

1

2

3

1, 3

2

1, 3

2


－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.


Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.


Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)


Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.(Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your car was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.


Oxygenated Fuels

MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL


If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your car back intocompliance will require the replace-ment of several components, such asthe oxygen sensors and the threeway catalytic converter. These re-placements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries

Technical Information370Information Provided by:

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in your car’sengine produces several byproducts.Some of these are carbon monoxide(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) andhydrocarbons (HC). Gasolineevaporating from the tank alsoproduces hydrocarbons. Controllingthe production of NOx, CO, and HCis important to the environment.Under certain conditions of sunlightand climate, NOx and HC react toform photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your car has a Positive CrankcaseVentilation System. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine’scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The Positive Crankcase

Ventilation valve routes them fromthe crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

250

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem


Emissions Controls


The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your car. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newgenuine Honda replacement parts ortheir equivalent for repairs. Usinglower quality parts may increase theemissions from your car.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls

Emissions Controls


PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter


Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your car away from high grass,dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your car’s three way catalyticconverter.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your car diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Technical Information 373


THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS


Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your car for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

Make sure the car has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Keep the car in Park (automatictransmission) or Neutral (manualtransmission). Increase the enginespeed to 2,000 rpm and hold itthere until the temperature gaugerises to at least 1/4 of the scale(approximately 3 minutes).

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the car re-tested within the nexttwo or three days, you can conditionthe car for re-testing by doing thefollowing.

State Emissions Testing


Testing of Readiness Codes


Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe car coast for several secondswithout using the acceleratorpedal or the brake pedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Car speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information 375Information Provided by:

Customer Relations................................Information . 378

....................Warranty Coverages . 379Reporting Safety Defects

.................................(U.S. Cars) . 380.....................Authorized Manuals . 381

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 377Information Provided by:

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Office.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your carDate of purchaseMileage on your carYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thecar to you

362

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations378

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

(787) 250-4318

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns the car.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

coversyour new car, except for the battery,emissions control systems, andaccessories, against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

these twowarranties cover your car’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of the car.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your car forprecise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your car.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

New Car Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 379Information Provided by:

If you believe that your car has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of cars, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Warranty and Customer Relations

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Cars)


＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００３

ＨＯＮ

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

381

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2003 Honda Accord

Service Manual

2003 Honda Accord V6

Service Manual Supplement

2003 Honda Accord

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003 Honda Accord Body Repair Manual

2003 Honda Accord 4 Door

Owner’s Manual

2003 Honda Accord Navigation

System Owner’s Manual

2003 Honda Accord 4 Door

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SDA00

61SDA01

61SDA00EL

61SDA30

31SDA600

31SDA700

31SDAQ00

HON-R

Price

Each

$70.00

$40.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$10.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

www. helminc. com


－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your car.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

382

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.


CONTINUED

Battery......Charging System Light . 58, 348

............................Jump Starting . 342..............................Maintenance . 294............................Specifications . 365

..............................Before Driving . 203..........................................Belts, Seat . 8

.........................Beverage Holders . 104...................................Body Repair . 332

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 230

.............Break-in, New Linings . 204....................Bulb Replacement . 317

...........................................Fluid . 284.......................................Parking . 102

.........................System Indicator . 58........................Wear Indicators . 229

.............................Braking System . 229........................Break-in, New Car . 204

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 69........................Brights, Headlights . 68

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 318

..............................Brake Lights . 317

..............................Ceiling Light . 320................Door Courtesy Light . 321................Front Parking Lights . 315

.................................Headlights . 312.........High-mount Brake Light . 319

...................License Plate Light . 319............................Specifications . 365

...................................Spotlights . 321...............................Trunk Light . 322

....................Turn Signal Lights . 315................Vanity Mirror Lights . 321

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 312

...Accessories and Modifications . 212................................Accessories . 212

.Additional Safety Precautions . 213............................Modifications . 213

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 78

.............Accessory Power Socket . 107....................Additives, Engine Oil . 270

.....................................Airbag (SRS) . 9.....................Air Cleaner Element . 286

............................Air Conditioning . 112..............................Maintenance . 299

.........................................Usage . 112.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 304.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 369

......................................Antifreeze . 273Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

................................Description . 230...............................Indicator . 57, 231

...................................Operation . 230.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 77

..........................Appearance Care . 325..........................................Armrest . 103

................Audio System . 134, 150, 169

.............Automatic Speed Control . 195..............Automatic Transmission . 222

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 364.......Checking Fluid Level . 280, 281

.......................................Shifting . 223.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 223

................Shift Lever Positions . 223....................Shift Lock Release . 226

Index

A

B

IInformation Provided by:

＊

............................Capacities Chart . 364.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 52

.............................Carrying Cargo . 214..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

..................CD Changer . 142, 157, 177.......................................CD Player . 140

........................CD Pocket, Center . 105

........................Certification Label . 362............................................Chains . 308

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 335............Changing Engine Coolant . 275

Changing Oil........................................How to . 270......................................When to . 250

...Charging System Indicator . 58, 348............Checklist, Before Driving . 218

..................Childproof Door Locks . 84.......................................Child Seats . 26

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39...................................Cleaner, Air . 286

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 327

...................................Carpeting . 328......................................Exterior . 326

.........................................Fabric . 329.......................................Interior . 328.......................................Leather . 329

...................................Seat Belts . 329...........................................Vinyl . 329

......................................Window . 330...............Climate Control System . 119

.........Clock, Setting the . 139, 156, 174...................................Clutch Fluid . 285

........................CO in the Exhaust . 372...................................Coin Pocket . 105

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 220..............................Compact Spare . 334

.................Console Compartment . 103...............Consumer Information . 378

.............Controls, Instruments and . 55Coolant

........................................Adding . 272....................................Checking . 210

.........................Proper Solution . 267...................Temperature Gauge . 64

....................Corrosion Protection . 331Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 371............Cruise Control Operation . 195..........Customer Relations Office . 378

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii.......................................Dashboard . 56

................Daytime Running Lights . 69............Defects, Reporting Safety . 380

................Defogger, Rear Window . 72....................................Dimensions . 364

...............Dimming the Headlights . 68Dipstick

.Automatic Transmission . 280, 281..................................Engine Oil . 208

..........................Directional Signals . 70........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 229

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 272Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 78..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 367

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 221

.....................................Drive Belts . 302...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 217....................................Economy . 211

.........................In Bad Weather . 235................In Foreign Countries . 370

Index

C D

IIInformation Provided by:

CONTINUED

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 300

..............................Economy, Fuel . 211............Emergencies on the Road . 333.............Battery, Jump Starting . 342...........Brake System Indicator . 351

................Changing a Flat Tire . 335.....Charging System Indicator . 348

..................Checking the Fuses . 354.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 347...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 349...Manually Closing Moonroof . 352

..................Overheated Engine . 345.........................Emergency Brake . 102

......................Emergency Flashers . 72......................Emergency Towing . 358.......................Emissions Controls . 371

Engine............................................Belts . 302

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 64Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 58, 349........Oil Pressure Indicator . 58, 347..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 268

...............................Overheating . 345............................Specifications . 365....................Speed Limiter . 222, 226

.......................................Starting . 219..........Engine Speed Limiter . 222, 226

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 369.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 371

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 52Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 19..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 326

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 329...................................Fan, Interior . 112

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 111

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 204Filter

.........................Dust and Pollen . 300...............................................Oil . 270

5-speed Manual Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 283

5-speed Manual Transmission................................Shifting the . 221

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 72...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 335

Fluids.Automatic Transmission . 280, 281

..........................................Brake . 284.........................................Clutch . 285

..............Manual Transmission . 283..........................Power Steering . 285

..................Windshield Washer . 279...........................Folding Rear Seat . 92

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 370..........................Four-way Flashers . 72

.................................................Fuel . 204......................Fill Door and Cap . 205

...........................................Gauge . 65................Octane Requirement . 204

...............................Oxygenated . 369........................Tank, Filling the . 204

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 354

Index

E

F

IIIInformation Provided by:

..................................................Keys . 74

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 211..........................................Gasohol . 369.........................................Gasoline . 204...........................................Gauge . 65

................Octane Requirement . 204........................Tank, Filling the . 204

................Gas Station Procedures . 204Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 64...............................................Fuel . 65

...............................Speedometer . 63.................................Tachometer . 63

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 222

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 221

..............................Glass Cleaning . 330........................................Glove Box . 86

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 312..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 72

........................................Headlights . 68........................................Aiming . 312

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 69............Daytime Running Lights . 69............Low Beams, Turning on . 68

.........................Reminder Chime . 68........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 312

...................................Turning on . 68..............................Head Restraints . 91

.....................Heating and Cooling . 112...............................Heated Mirror . 102

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 220HomeLink Wireless Control

........................................System . 198.......................Hood, Opening the . 206

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 285.................................Hydroplaning . 236 ........................Jacking up the Car . 337

.......................................Jack, Tire . 336................................Jump Starting . 342

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 362Ignition

..............................................Keys . 74...........................................Switch . 77

............Timing Control System . 372........................Immobilizer System . 76

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 57

...............................Infant Restraint . 30......................................Infant Seats . 30

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 39...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 303

.................................Inside Mirror . 101.............................Inspection, Tire . 305

............................Instrument Panel . 57........Instrument Panel Brightness . 69

...........................Interior Cleaning . 328...............................Interior Lights . 108

........................................Introduction . i

Index

G

H

I

J

K

IVInformation Provided by:

CONTINUED

..................................Maintenance . 245...Owner Maintenance Checks . 265

........................................Record . 260......................Required Indicator . 65

..........................................Safety . 246.............................Schedule . 250-259

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 58, 349...................Manual Transmission . 221

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 283...............................Meters, Gauges . 63

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 369........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 101

.......................................Moonroof . 100......................Closing Manually . 352

...................................Operation . 100

...................Neutral Gear Position . 224..................New Vehicle Break-in . 204

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 222..................NOTICE, Explanation of . ii

...............Numbers, Identification . 362

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 204.........................................Odometer . 63

Odometer/Outside Temperature......................................Indicator . 63

...............................Odometer, Trip . 64Oil

........................Change, How to . 270......................Change, When to . 250......................Checking Engine . 208..............Pressure Indicator . 58, 347

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 269

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 78..Operation in Foreign Countries . 370

............................Outside Mirrors . 101.....................Outside Temperature . 64

....................Overheating, Engine . 345.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 265

..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 369

.......................Label, Certification . 362.................Lane Change, Signaling . 70

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 42.........................Leather, Cleaning . 329

Lights....................Bulb Replacement . 312

.......................................Indicator . 57.........................................Parking . 58

..................................Turn Signal . 60......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 77

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 77

............................Fuel Fill Door . 205....................................Glove Box . 86

...........................................Trunk . 84........................Low Coolant Level . 210

...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 221...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 58, 347

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 364.........................................Luggage . 214

Index

L M

N

O

VInformation Provided by:

＊

..............Panel Brightness Control . 69........................Park Gear Position . 224

...........................................Parking . 228...............................Parking Brake . 102.................................Parking Lights . 58

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 373.............................PGM-FI System . 372

..................Polishing and Waxing . 327...................................Pollen Filter . 300

............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 11.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

............................Protecting Adults . 12...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19........................Protecting Children . 21.......................Protecting Infants . 30

.......Protecting Larger Children . 36.........Protecting Small Children . 33

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 39

.................................Using LATCH . 40

...................Radiator Overheating . 345Radio/CD Sound

.......................System . 134, 150, 169..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 318

..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 93

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 92..........................Rear View Mirror . 101

.................Rear Window Defogger . 72.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 87, 90

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 222.............................Reminder Lights . 57

.......................Remote Transmitter . 80Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 286.......................................Coolant . 275

................Engine Oil and Filter . 270..........................................Fuses . 354

................................Light Bulbs . 312....................................Schedule . 250

.......................Spark Plugs . 289, 292...........................................Tires . 306

.............................Wiper Blades . 297Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 44

.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 210...............................Restraint, Child . 21

..................Reverse Gear Position . 224................................Rotation, Tire . 306

........................................Safety Belts . 8.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 380

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

.......................................Seat Belts . 8..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 10

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 53...............................Safety Messages . ii

...........................................Seat Belts . 8...............Additional Information . 42

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 43

.....................................Cleaning . 329......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 42

................................Maintenance . 44Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 42, 58

Index

R

S

P

VIInformation Provided by:

＊

CONTINUED

...................System Components . 42...............Use During Pregnancy . 19

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 87............................Security System . 194

.........................Select/Reset Knob . 65...............................Serial Number . 362

...........................Service Intervals . 250

...........................Service Manual . 382.........Service Station Procedures . 204

..........Setting the Clock . 139, 156, 174.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 223

........................Shift Lock Release . 226....................................Side Airbags . 47

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 47How The SIDE Airbag Cutoff

...........Indicator Light Works . 49......................Side Curtain Airbags . 48

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 48

...............................Signaling Turns . 68.....................................Snow Tires . 308

...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 326................Sound System . 134, 150, 169

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 334

............................Specifications . 366

........Spark Plugs, Replacing . 289, 292....................Specifications Charts . 364

................................Speed Control . 195

........................Speed Limiter . 222, 226...................................Speedometer . 63

..........SRS, Additional Information . 45...Additional Safety Precautions . 51

How Your Airbags............................Work . 45, 47, 48

How Your SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 48

........................SRS Components . 45..................................SRS Service . 51

.............................SRS Indicator . 48, 59....START (Ignition Key Position) . 78

.......................Starting the Engine . 219In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 220................With a Dead Battery . 342

........Steam Coming from Engine . 345Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 73.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 77

Stereo Sound.......................System . 134, 150, 169

...........................Storing Your Car . 323

........................................Sun Visor . 106........................Sunglasses Holder . 107

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 51

.........................SRS Indicator . 48, 59...................System Components . 45

..................................Synthetic Oil . 269

.....................................Tachometer . 63......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 317

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 333Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 367.....Emissions Control Systems . 371

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 369Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 373.......................Temperature Gauge . 64

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 39..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 373

..........Time, Setting the . 139, 156, 174....................................Timing Belt . 302

Index

T

VIIInformation Provided by:

＊

....................................Tire Chains . 308.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 335

...............................................Tires . 303..............................Air Pressure . 304

.........................Checking Wear . 305..........................Compact Spare . 334

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 367......................................Inflation . 303

..................................Inspection . 305...................................Replacing . 306

......................................Rotating . 306...........................................Snow . 308

............................Specifications . 366...................Tools, Tire Changing . 335

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 237

................Emergency Wrecker . 358..............Traction Control System . 232

...TCS Activation Indicator . 59, 233......................TCS Indicator . 60, 232

...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 233Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,......................Automatic . 280, 281

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 283

..................Fluid Selection . 280, 283..............Identification Number . 362.............Shifting the Automatic . 223

..................Shifting the Manual . 221.....................................Treadwear . 367.......................................Trip Meter . 64

................................................Trunk . 84....................Emergency Opener . 85

.................................Opening the . 84...................Open Monitor Light . 60

....................................Turn Signals . 70

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 331Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 333....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 367

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 204.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 328

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 272

................................Vanity Mirror . 106.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 215

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 364....Vehicle Identification Number . 362

.............................Vehicle Storage . 323.................................................VIN . 362

...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 329..................................Viscosity, Oil . 269

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 53

..................Warranty Coverages . 379Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 279.....................................Operation . 72

.........................................Washing . 326..................Waxing and Polishing . 327

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 73............Alignment and Balance . 305

..........................Compact Spare . 334......................................Wrench . 337

Windows.....................................Cleaning . 330

..................Operating the Power . 96...........................Rear, Defogger . 72

Index

U

V

W

VIIIInformation Provided by:

＊

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 70.......................................Washers . 72

Wipers, Windshield.......................Changing Blades . 297

.....................................Operation . 70....................................Worn Tires . 305

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 358

: U.S. only

Index

IXInformation Provided by:

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )Capacity:

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

LXFront:

Rear:

All other modelsFront:

Rear:268

280 281

285

284

283


2003 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual...

Documents

Transcript of 2003 Accord Sedan Online Reference Owner's Manual...